Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

schedules. scope. and customize the project as necessary.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 13 Click OK. In this case. drawing sheets. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. the parameter is one of association or connection. click Training Files. the door retains this relationship to the partition. For most tutorial projects.rte. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. 2D and 3D view. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and residential. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If the length of the elevation is changed. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and open Metric\Templates. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and plans. In this case. quantities. the floor or roof remains connected. 12 Select DefaultMetric. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. sections. drawings. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you will use the default template. and schedules required for a building project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and click Open. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. review the Revit Architecture templates. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. As you work in drawing and schedule views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. hence. In the Revit Architecture model. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. the operation of the software is parametric. If you move the partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. how to navigate the user interface. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the hierarchy of elements. construction. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. every drawing sheet. You learn the terminology. and phases when you need it.

The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. Understanding the Basics | 7 . levels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. windows. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. walls. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. walls and roofs are hosts. For example. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. For example. and 2D detail components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. doors. tags. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and cabinets are model components. Examples include detail lines. If you can draw. doors. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. dimensions. They help to describe or document the model. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. programming is not required. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. dimensions.When you change something. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. grids. filled regions. tags. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. and roofs are model elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They display in relevant views of the model. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. windows.

you must be in a section or elevation view. and ceilings. you can explicitly control them. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. To place levels. section views. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. such as roofs. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. However. you do nothing to establish these relationships. for example. Project: In Revit Architecture. floors. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. By using a single project file. Most often. families. Often. In other cases. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. top of wall. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. and types. views of the project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. The project file contains all information for the building design. This information includes components used to design the model. and drawings of the design. schedules. and so forth). elevation views. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. from geometry to construction data. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction .In Revit Architecture. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. first floor.

Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. dimensions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). roofs. In the steps that follow. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. System families include walls. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. A type can also be a style. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can be a specific size of a family. and similar graphical representation. categories of model elements include walls and beams. However. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . the user interface is labeled. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. ceilings. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. For example. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and levels. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. specifically its clear user interface. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. making it easy to understand what each button represents. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. In the following illustration. For example. floors. identical use. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system.

the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click (New). In addition.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. This creates a new project based on the default template. By default. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. For example. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . and View. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. which are listed on the menu. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. you type the required key combination to perform the command. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Edit. While working in the drawing area. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. When you select the Door tool. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . when you add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. On the left side of the Options Bar. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. a door type is specified. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door.

You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . immediately below the Type Selector. containing buttons grouped by function. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. click the tab in the Design Bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. select Views (all). In the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.

■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. walls. families. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. family category (doors. The browser is dockable. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. reports. sheets. elevations.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. windows). Navigating the User Interface | 15 . To open a view. schedules. double-click its name. and group name. delete. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. 3D). and groups. families. and rename views.

In the bottom left corner of the window. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme. click Wall. click Cancel. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor displays as a pencil. Do not click. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.

It highlights when the cursor is over it. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. press F1 for help. In the status bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. After you are familiar with these tasks. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Windows: From any window. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. There are several tools that help you find information. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. in conjunction with tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. You can use this tri-pane. press F1 for context-sensitive help. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can also press SHIFT+F1. If no Help button displays. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Toolbar: From the toolbar. click on the Standard toolbar.18 On the Design Bar. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. When you place the cursor over an element. Click the Help button. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. In addition. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. find a keyword on the Index tab. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. regarding selected elements in a view. Tooltips: To see tooltips. 20 Press TAB. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. The status bar also provides information.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and open Metric\m_Cohouse. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms out from the building model. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 5 On the View toolbar.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps.rvt. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view.

As you move the mouse.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 6 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. When you release the mouse button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 7 Click in the drawing area. 10 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. on the View toolbar.

14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Similar controls. and select the wall. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (all). display along the ends. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. 15 To exit the wheel. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. press ESC. 17 Type ZR. To define settings for SteeringWheels. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Small blue dots. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Cnst. and click Help. For more information about SteeringWheels. When drawing or modifying a building model. These are the drag controls. and double-click 2nd Flr. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . moving the wheel to the desired location. called drag controls.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. referred to as shape handles. and then using the Zoom tool again. click Settings menu ➤ Options. bottoms. and click the SteeringWheels tab. as shown.

22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . such as Move and Copy. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. 23 Click next to the lower wall. Some commands. as shown. for example.18 Click and drag the left control. require 2 clicks to complete the command. click to specify the starting position. click (Move). 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. In this case. and on the Tools toolbar. After selecting the element to move. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. you want to move the table closer to the wall. The table moves down. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. and click again to specify the ending position. to lengthen the wall.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. and drag it on top of the table. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 24 Select the plant. or press CTRL+Z. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the Undo command. Some commands. In this example. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. and click again to end it. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. 26 On the Undo menu. on the Standard toolbar. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Move. such as the Lines command. click Lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. select the second item in the list. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

On the Design Bar. click Modify. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

this tutorial uses imperial units only. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. When you have finished these tutorials. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. detail. and annotate building assemblies. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. illustrating how building components work together. 27 . Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Use detail components to define an assembly. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. or referenced as a drafting view. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In Revit Architecture. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In this tutorial. but for training purposes.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. create a reference callout. 3 In the Scale list. and reference a drafting view. scroll until the folder is displayed. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. click Drafting View. import a DWG detail. enter Window Head Detail. you will create a drafting view. click Training Files. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected.rvt. and click OK.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. If necessary.

the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. The model zooms out. located directly to the left of the drawing area. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.dwg. 6 In the Colors field list. 10 In the drawing area. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. displaying the extents of the detail. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information.). and click Open. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. as shown. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . select Black and White.In the Project Browser. 9 Type ZR. click Training Files. The drawing area is still blank.

select Detail View: Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.The view displays to the specified area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click Callout. in the Type Selector. and in the Scale list. 13 Click Reference other view. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. to activate the view selection list. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 In the drawing area.

rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click the reference callout tag head. in the Type Selector. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The reference callout is created. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. select Callout. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 3 In the drawing area. and in the Scale list. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. select Detail View: Detail. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . adjust the detail view display settings. c_express_workshop_details_start. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area.

click Modify to clear the selection. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the drawing area. 5 In the Rename View dialog. enter Wall Base 1. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). 4 Right-click Detail 0. and click OK. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Detail Views (Detail).The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. for Name. and click Rename. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.

This is the view crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area.

16 Click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). 14 In the drawing area. right-click. and click OK. under Graphics. select As Underlay.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. for Display Model. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 On the View Control Bar. and click View Properties.

type 1' 6''. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 17 On the View Control Bar. Directly above the drawing area. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By grouping detail components. typical details can easily be placed. Model-Based Detailing | 35 .Brick on Mtl. 19 In the Type Selector. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. on the Options Bar. 20 In the drawing area. Stud. click Detail Components. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. and press ENTER. If the crop region is enlarged.

25 In the Project Browser. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 23 Using the same method. add the following detail components as shown. and click Create Instance.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

28 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can customize this list. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. click Training Files. c_express_workshop_details_start. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. in the type selector. and Free End are selected. map keynotes by material. For more information about customizing a keynote database. 4 On the Options Bar.txt. click Browse. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . consistent means of identifying building assembly components.rvt. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. special notes. and verify that Horizontal. and under Keynote Table. In the next exercise. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. or instructions within a construction documentation package. Leader. and format keynote styles. click Keynote ➤ Element. for Full Path.

If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.5 In the drawing area. If no value has been specified. Either move the text inside. 8 Click to place the tag. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. Keynoting | 39 . TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 7 Click to place the leader arm. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 9 Press ESC to end the command. a question mark displays.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.

12 Click to place the leader arm. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You will now change all keynotes to keys only. and click OK.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. click Keynote ➤ Material. 15 Select 07 21 00. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 13 Click to place the tag.

and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information.All items within the selection display in red. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 17 On the Options Bar. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Click OK. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Only the keynotes remain selected. Select Keynote Tags. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click Check None. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 .Boxed. 19 In the Type Selector.

Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . update the project information element properties. Add labels to a title block. Update drawing sheet and project information. this tutorial uses imperial units only. but for training purposes. In this lesson. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. In this exercise. and modify and update the project sheet title block. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet.

Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In Revit Architecture. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. In the Project Browser. or in the element properties of the title block. click Training Files.rvt. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. scroll until the folder is displayed. If necessary. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 3 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. double-click Checker. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. and click Rename. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. To pan.Unnamed. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. 6 In the Title Block. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. Click OK. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Smith and press ENTER. 9 In the Project Browser. enter A602. enter Sections/Details. 7 Enter K. under Sheets(all). hold down the wheel and drag. 5 In the drawing area. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify to clear the selection. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. you can enter ZE to zoom out. For Name. To zoom in and out. Then. right-click A602 . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.4 Type ZR. In this tutorial. roll the wheel. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.

and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. (Left) is selected. For Project Status. enter J. Smith. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 18 On the Options Bar. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. click Text. 16 Type ZR. 15 In the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. select the title block. For Client Name. 17 On the Design Bar. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 20 Click and type Project Status. select Text : 1/8''. in the Type Selector. enter 4/10/2008. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 Click OK.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter Design Development. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. For Project Name.

in the Type Selector. to add 28 Using the same method. and click. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and verify that (Top) are selected. click Label. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. add Project Issue Date parameter. and click OK. click Modify to exit the command. as shown.21 On the Design Bar. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. click (Load into Project). 22 Using the same method. under Category Parameters. select Label : 3/16''. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 23 On the Design Bar.

In this exercise. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. and under Keynote Table. a viewport displays. for Name. you will create. Next you will create. click Browse. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. for Full Path. representing the view or schedule. and click Yes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. to a drawing sheet. click Training Files. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. place and modify a keynote legend.Project.txt. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . enter Keynote Legend . 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend.30 In the Reload Family dialog. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.

and click OK. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. on the Appearance tab.Sections/Details.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and drag Keynote Legend .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. as shown. expand Legends. under Text. double-click A601 . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. clear Show Headers. under Sheets (all).

13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.Project as shown. The keynote legend is visible. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.

right-click Keynote Legend . select Filter by sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. for Filter. for View Name. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. enter Keynote Legend . and click Properties. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. click Edit. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Legends. The Keynote Legend is now blank. expand Detail Views (Detail). at the bottom of the Filter tab. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Project. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Sheet. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. not keynotes. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 19 Click OK twice. and click OK. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click OK.

The keynote legend is automatically updated. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and then add and update a Drawing list. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.Title Sheet 1. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. double-click A0 . as shown. The view title with line displays below the viewport. The view remains selected. 2 In the Project Browser.

Revit Architecture displays a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection.When you place a view on a sheet. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. Press ESC to clear the selection. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. As part of a construction document set. by default. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 6 Type ZR. 3 In the Type Selector. expand Schedules/Quantities. as shown. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. and zoom in on the drawing list. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. define the information to include in a view title. or omit view titles from sheets. The drawing list remains selected. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 5 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all). and click OK. The drawing list display is updated. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. while pressing SHIFT. under Identity Data. select A602 .Ceiling Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. including only sheets that contain views. clear Appears In Drawing List.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the selected sheets.Sections/Details and select A801 . and click Properties. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

a central service core.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. After the beginning exercises. 57 . or “flex the model” by changing parameters. If the grid moves. it is good practice to test the constraints. As you develop the building design. For example. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. a curtain wall. the wall or column will move with it. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them.

3 Under Template file. under Projects. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. levels. and click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as a door or window. views. click New. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and customize the project as necessary. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. locate the Project Browser. from the product library. For this project. you load any required family type that is not in your project. select Project. construction. The new project opens. In practice. you design inside the elevation markers. notice four elevation markers. verify that the second option is selected. but contains no geometry. and settings. Creating the Project In this exercise. you use a template that is provided with the software. and residential. In the drawing area in the right pane. with an RVT extension. In views that display elevation markers. The project is stored as a single file. South. under Create new. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. click Training Files. West. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area.rte. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. To create the project file.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. East. you will use the default template. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North.

content and building model reports. 10 In the Project Browser. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. schedules. and Elevations (Building Elevation). such as schedules and legends.rvt) is selected. Two level lines. reflected ceiling plan views. you will want to save your work frequently. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. These views are customizable: you can rename them. NOTE If you create a project without a template. double-click Metric. notice the Legends. 16 Click Save. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. expand Views (all). Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. enter Revit Retail Building. change their properties. As you design and document your building model.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. then expand Floor Plans. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. double-click South. Families. and duplicate levels. Ceiling Plans. duplicate them. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. created by the template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. view the Save reminder interval. and families in your project. and on the General tab. and other properties. 13 In the file window. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. the view you see in the drawing area. display in the south elevation. delete. and click Training Files. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Schedules/Quantities. heights. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. and elevation views created in the project by the template.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating the Project | 59 . sheets. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Under Floor Plans. You can add. and delete them. 14 For File name. verify that Project Files (*. as well as change their names. Groups. 7 If necessary. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 15 For Save as type. Sheets (all). Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

When you begin designing. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. After you modify the two default levels. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. expand Views (all). you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. or constrained. doors. You change the names of the 2 default levels. and windows within the building model. and double-click South. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. Adding Project Levels on page 60. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .17 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 00 Foundation. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. so that when one level moves. and press ENTER. to each other. the other levels move and change with it. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). You learn how the levels are locked. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.

and press ESC. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. and click OK. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. enter 01 Entry Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 16 Enter 3750. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. When you add the new level. 14 Click Plan View Types. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. right-click. and click Basics. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 5 In the Project Browser. not all the tabs are visible. As you move the cursor. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Adding Project Levels | 61 . click Level. and press ENTER. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. By default. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. which should display by default. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. If it does not. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. enter -1800. This is the Options Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. view the Design Bar. enter 0. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and press ENTER. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and then move it up. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. Next. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser.

Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and enter 02 Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. under Floor Plans. 26 Press ESC. click Level. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Next. using a different option. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. and for Offset. and move it slightly upward. and rename the corresponding views. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. click (Pick Lines). If you create a level by copying it. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. you add another level. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. click Modify to end the command. click Rename.18 In the Project Browser. enter 3750. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 3. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 19 Click OK. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 25 Click to place the level line. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. or on the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well.

and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. as shown. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. and you can move them independently. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. all the levels move.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Notice that by moving the top level. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Adding Project Levels | 63 . 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. the levels are no longer constrained.

On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. When the grid is complete. click Modify. the column height changes as well. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. select (Draw). 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify a start point for the grid line. click Grid. In a later exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. Move the cursor up. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. In the following exercise.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. so that if the roof elevation changes. under Floor Plans. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model.

and click to place the line. for Offset. for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. enter 4500 mm. enter 7500 mm. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and for Offset. Click to place the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click Grid. On the Options Bar. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Next. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and press ENTER.

8 Press ESC. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. as shown. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . On the Options Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 11 On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. click Grid.

16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select grid lines C and 3. 18 On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 21 Press ESC twice. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. click Dimension. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 15 Starting with grid line A. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Aligned).

and select None. and click OK. select grid line 5. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 26 In the drawing area. until it is closer to grid line 5. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. Two pins display on the grid lines. click the value for Center Segment. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click and drag the blue circular grip up. and select grid line A.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. (Element Properties). 33 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. The pins are hidden. and press ESC. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. At the left endpoint of the grid line. If necessary. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 6. enter 50mm. 32 Click OK twice. 29 In the Name dialog. and press ESC. click Duplicate. click Modify. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. until it is closer to grid line A. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 24 Press ESC. click Edit/New. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . By pinning these central grid lines. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 31 For End Segments Length. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click .

For Place By. The original continuous grid lines are restored. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . click (Grid Intersection). 37 Select the grid lines again. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC. click Finish. select Grid : 6. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. select Grid : 6. and on the Options Bar. select all of the grid lines. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 35 In the Type Selector.5mm Bubble with Gap. 36 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Structural Column.5mm Bubble. and in the Type Selector. 39 In the Type Selector.

45 While pressing CTRL. 46 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. under Floor Plans. 43 Press ESC.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 47 Enter 9000. select 01 Entry Level. 48 On the Standard toolbar. lock it. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. and press ENTER. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. select grid line A. If it is unlocked. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. for From. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 52 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and unlock it. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Activate Dimensions. click Camera. Next. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked.

and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

under Views (all).55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. Adding Beams In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Rename. When you finish adding beams. Right-click 3D View 1. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. named 3D View 1 by default. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. In the Rename View dialog. Adding Beams on page 72. enter To Building. and then copy them to subsequent levels. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. displays in bold under 3D Views. and click OK. expand 3D Views.

click Finish. double-click 01 Entry Level. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The view is currently set to Coarse. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 While pressing CTRL. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. The selected grid lines display as red. 4 Click Medium. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. select each grid line. Adding Beams | 73 . the icon on the right side of the scale. under 3D Views. click Beam. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Type Selector.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click (Create Beam On Grid). A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. view the icons on the View Control Bar.

13 On the Design Bar. select 02 Level. 14 Select one of the beams. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. press and hold SHIFT. and click Select All Instances. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 12 On the View toolbar. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof. click (Default 3D View). double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. click Modify. right-click. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

and click OK. and click Element Properties. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and if necessary. 22 On the Options Bar. select 06 Roof. and click Select All Instances. right-click.to the 5th level. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. for Top Level. All of the columns display as red. When you created the columns. (Element Properties). under 3D Views. Adding Beams | 75 . double-click To Building. click 24 Press ESC. view the Top Level parameter. under Constraints. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 20 Click Cancel. resize the view to see the entire structure. 06 Roof. 21 With the column selected. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 19 In the Element Properties dialog.

NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press ESC to exit the command before continuing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. but you want to display them in less detail. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. under Elevations. as lines only. 28 Save the drawing.

Adding Braces In this exercise. click Framing Elevation.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 77 . To better add the braces to the structure. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. and press ESC to end the command. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. you create 8 framing elevation views. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces on page 77. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid.

and when the endpoint snap displays. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 8 In the Type Selector. click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 11 Using the same technique. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 7 On the Design Bar. After you add the final brace. click to specify the start point of the brace. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. double-click the elevation marker arrow. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. press ESC twice. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. The associated framing elevation view displays.

Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. and press ENTER. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Adding Braces | 79 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. enter 18000 mm.

enter 10000 mm. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. but this time add them from right to left. 14 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation.

NOTE As you add braces. 19 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. Adding Braces | 81 . and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. as shown in the 3D view below. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and press ENTER. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 21 Select grid line A. double-click 00 Foundation. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. enter 12000 mm. click Activate Dimensions.

double-click South. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. under Floor Plans. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. beams. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click and roof height. 26 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. under 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. Test connectivity of the columns. 29 In the Project Browser.24 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. lock it. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and drag it away from the structure. double-click {3D}. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 28 On the Standard toolbar. grid size. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 31 Save the drawing. and if necessary. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. Click OK twice. and click View Properties. click Training Files. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. under Extents. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the View Range dialog. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. for View Range. select Unlimited. and expand Structural Foundations. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Edit. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. The pile cap has been added in the view. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. The foundation pile cap now displays. under Floor Plans. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and press ESC twice.Before you can add the pile caps. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. for Level. A warning displays. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. under View Depth. After you load the pile cap family.rfa. and how to load specific families into a project. double-click 00 Foundation. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). expand Families. Creating a Foundation | 83 . and drag it to the drawing area.

and click Create Similar. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC twice. When the final pile cap is placed.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the types of the columns. 2 Select one of the columns.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. double-click {3D}. and click Select All Instances. and brace families into the project. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. under 3D Views. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. All columns in the building model display as red. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. You load new column. beams. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. beam. right-click. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure.

6X15. enter 75mm. and click Select All Instances. 10 On the Options Bar. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. click (Element Properties). click Modify. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 13 In the Name dialog. In the following steps. you change the brace type. and changing its size parameter.9. click (Default 3D View). 7 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 4 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 16 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select the braces in the elevation one by one. but it is the only size of its type currently available. This not the size that you want to use. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. the braces as well as the beams change. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. click Brace.5CHS. for d. 18 In the Type Selector. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. right-click. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. double-click Elevation 1-a. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify.2X101. for Type.3 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. The building model displays the round hollow columns. enter 75mm. 17 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. The brace type changes.

and click Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . select Auto . select m_RRB_structure_complete. After the files are linked. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.Origin to Origin. 3 Under Positioning. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.rvt. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

In this case. and walls could also be copy/monitored. however. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. and click Select Link. 9 In the drawing area. while pressing CTRL. click Copy. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. select Multiple. select the linked Revit model. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. After the link is established. structural members. double-click South. under Elevations. 6 In the drawing area. depending on the project. select Levels 00 through 06. 8 On the Options Bar. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Grids.4 In the Project Browser. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. click (Copy/Monitor). 5 On the Tools toolbar.

under Floor Plans. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Using the same method. while pressing SHIFT. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. and click Delete. delete the Level 2 floor plan. right-click Level 1. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New Plan dialog. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. for Floor Plan views. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. click Finish mode. 16 Click OK. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . First. click Finish.10 On the Options Bar.

double-click 00 Foundation. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 21 In the drawing area. for Name. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans. right-click. 24 In the New View Template dialog. click OK. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. right-click. 20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select the Topography : Surface. under Floor Plans. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. enter Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK.19 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. double-click Site. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 34 In the 3D view that displays. under Names. select Floor Plans. click Camera. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Linking the Structural Model | 91 .

and click OK. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Floors In this exercise. stairs. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. and click Rename. To create floors.35 In the Project Browser. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. right-click 3D View 1. enter To Building. such as roofs. 36 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and railings are also created from sketches.rvt. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. expand 3D Views. Some other Revit Architecture elements. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Adding Floors on page 92.

At the top left corner of the grid. Leave this dimension unlocked. select the top floor line. Move the cursor to the left. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. and elements in the current view display as gray. You are now in the Sketch Editor. If the grid changes size. double-click 01 Entry Level. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Do not lock the dimension. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. and then the first horizontal grid line. click Floor. On the Options Bar. click Lines.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. On the Sketch tab. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Adding Floors | 93 . ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. past the first vertical grid line. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Dimension. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. under Floor Plans.

94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Do not lock the dimensions. and change their values to 300 mm. Select and lock the dimensions. They display on the floor sketch. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. press ENTER. and then press ESC. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. Enter 300.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and click the temporary dimension value. select the top floor line. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor.

Select the three remaining floor lines. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. double-click 02 Level. click Floor. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. click Quit Sketch. On the Options Bar. using a different sketching technique. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. under Floor Plans. on the Design Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. On the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 95 . and lock the dimensions.8 Select the floor. click Lines. click Edit. click (Pick Lines). 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and press ESC. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. enter 1500mm. and for Offset. Next. and on the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. under Floor Plans. and a lock icon displays. click (Rectangle). 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 18 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor displays. 17 On the Sketch tab. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click the locks to constrain the floors.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. click (Align). The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 20 On the Tools toolbar. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line.

33 At the top left corner of the grid. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 32 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. 35 On the Sketch tab. click Edit. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Adding Floors | 97 . Alternatively. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. click Finish Sketch. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Views ➤ 3D Views. and lock the edges. click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 31 In the Project Browser.24 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and click OK. double-click {3D}. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. under Floor Plans.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 3 On the Design Bar. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. click to place the roof line. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. Click (Pick Lines). 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When a blue dashed line displays. enter 1800 mm. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. click Lines. To create the roof. ■ ■ For Offset. Adding a Roof on page 98. and press ENTER.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Roof In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. double-click 06 Roof. click Training Files.

click to place the roof line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 7 On the Options Bar. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. Adding a Roof | 99 .6 Select grid line 5. for Offset. enter 300 mm. and when the blue dashed line displays.

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. click (Trim/Extend).10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select the roof.

17 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and click to specify the section. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. Adding a Roof | 101 . click Section. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. for Elevation. enter -100 mm. click Modify. move the cursor down below the roof. 15 On the Options Bar.14 On the Options Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. on grid D.

double-click 06 Roof. In section. select Variable. click Edit/New. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Floor Plans. for Structure. 30 Click OK 3 times. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. and on the Options Bar. for Structure [1]. under Construction. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select the roof. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 24 In the Project Browser. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. click Edit.20 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). click Modify. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog.

select each edge. on the View Control Bar. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 38 In the 3D view. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. In this case. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click OK. select the section line. moving counter-clockwise. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 41 Starting with the left front edge. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. click Modify. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 40 In the Type Selector.Roof Edge. click (Default 3D View). 37 If necessary. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand.31 On the Design Bar. Adding a Roof | 103 . and press DELETE. select Fascia : Fascia . 33 In the warning dialog.

View the roof 43 In the Project Browser.42 On the Design Bar. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. double-click To Building. so if you resize the grid. the curtain wall resizes with it. you add a curtain wall. under 3D Views. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. click Modify. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

For Level. When you duplicate a type. For Offset. click Edit/New. select 01 Entry Level. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. and click OK. click 01 Entry Level. for Spacing. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Under Construction. select 05 Roof Garden. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter 600 mm. and move it slightly toward the building interior. The type is saved in the project. enter 2100 mm.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click Duplicate. click Training Files. 3 In the Type Selector. for Spacing. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click to place the first curtain wall segment.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. enter 1050 mm. click Wall. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Height. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Join Condition. 6 In the Name dialog. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Type. enter Retail Storefront.

click (Trim/Extend). and trim each curtain wall segment. and lock the dimensions. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. These dimensions are not in a sketch. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. so they remain in the view. click Dimension. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. you can delete the dimensions. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. If you want to hide them.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. If the grid moves.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance on page 107. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance | 107 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 7 Click OK. and click None. All the elements in the list are selected. click All. To better work with the curtain wall panels. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). clear one element to clear all the elements. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). and double-click South. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 4 On the Model Categories tab. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 5 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. under the element list.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Do not select Columns. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 6 Under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. in this case an architectural elevation. 10 Select 1 panel. press and hold CTRL. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 18 On the View Control Bar. in the Type Selector. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. select Architectural Elevation. 12 With the panels selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. double-click {3D}. click Modify. select System Panel : Solid. Creating an Entrance | 109 . If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics.9 On the Design Bar.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation).19 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South.

30 On the Design Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. click Add or Remove Segments. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. select One Segment.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. select another mullion to the right. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 27 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and unpin it. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. click Curtain Grid. click Modify.

and view the new entrance. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. select it. and unpin it. 34 On the View toolbar. press TAB until it is selected. click (Default 3D View). 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and add an entrance to the north side of the building. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 3rd.38 Press DELETE. remove the mullions from the 2nd. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 39 Using the same process. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and 4th panels. 40 Optionally. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

and click View Properties. click Training Files.rvt. select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Right-click in the view. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. for Underlay.

Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 8 Select the callout. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . and click Rename. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. click Callout. under Floor Plans. enter Display Area. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. which indicates you must draw the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. The cursor changes to a pencil. select the grip closest to the callout head. and click OK.

and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. right-click. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 Press ESC.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 13 Select the section line. 12 Draw a section line. 16 Select the section box. and click Flip Section. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.

135mm Partition (2-hr). 26 On the Design Bar.17 In the Project Browser. click Wall. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Press ESC twice. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. click (Align). and click Rename. Click (Rectangle). 18 In the Rename View dialog. 24 On the Tools toolbar. select Wall faces. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . For Loc Line. double-click 01 Entry Level. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). Lock both alignments. click Dimension. expand Sections (Building Section). enter Section Display Area. select Finish Face: Exterior. for Prefer. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. select Basic Wall : Interior . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1.

32 In the Type Selector. double-click Section Display Area. 38 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. Next. under Sections (Building Section). 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. and lock the dimension. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 37 In the Project Browser.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. under Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .) 36 Press ESC twice.

and click to select the walls. under Sections. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click to select the walls.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. click (Element Properties). and press ESC. for Base Offset. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 46 Press ESC. 41 On the Options Bar. enter 2700 mm. On the Options Bar. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. double-click Section Display Area. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Height Offset From Level. click to select it. for Top/Base. 43 On the Design Bar. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 47 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Constraints. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. and click OK. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). enter 2700 mm. click Attach. under Constraints. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected.

view the ceiling structure. and click . 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. for Structure. click (Rotate). 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Edit/New. click Cancel. under Ceiling Plans. click Edit. double-click 01 Entry Level. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 54 Click OK. click Cancel. under Construction.

61 Press ESC. enter 45.60 Click. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . and press ENTER.

copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows On. double-click To Building. click Shadows Off. 66 Optionally. 64 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and for Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. double-click 01 Entry Level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and click to create a reference plane to the right. and copy it to the 05 Level. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. enter 1500 mm.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . Move the cursor over grid line B. and click to create a reference plane to the left. under Floor Plans.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.

9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2. and 3. click Modify. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and specify a point to create first stair flight. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 6 Select the left reference plane. shorten the right reference plane. 7 Using the same method.5 On the Design Bar. C. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B.

and select the 2nd reference plane. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. beyond the end of the stair. click Wall. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Finish Face: Interior. Click (Rectangle). and specify a point. 12 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor down. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain.225mm Masonry. The complete stair displays. including its handrails. select Basic Wall : Generic .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 10 On the Options Bar.

select the dimension value. and press ENTER. 18 Using the same technique. Select the bottom of the stair. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to select it. enter 1200 mm. click Align. Click Modify. Lock the dimension. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Prefer. Select the wall. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. select Wall faces. and lock the alignment. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. and specify a point away from the wall. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Select the interior face of the wall. click Dimension. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall.

press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. select both reference planes. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. The stair and walls move to the left. (Undo). TIP To flip the door swing. 28 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 23 Select the stair. click Door. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 27 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. 25 While pressing CTRL. Because the dimension is constrained. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. and press DELETE. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. a warning displays.21 Select the dimension. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 .

you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Under Constraints. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. For Top Constraint. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. (Element Properties). select 00 Foundation. select all 4 walls. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 33 Select the stair. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). under Floor Plans. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected.30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Click OK. and move the cursor to spin the building model. (SteeringWheels). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. (Rectangle). double-click 01 Entry Level. Click OK. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the View toolbar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. for Multistory Top Level. (Default 3D View). and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. select 05 Roof Garden. click Align. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. but if you view the top level of the building. for Base Constraint. click 36 On the View toolbar. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.

(SteeringWheels). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and lock the alignments. and click OK.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. click see the roof. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. on the View toolbar.

and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). By offsetting the base. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.55 In the Project Browser. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. (Default 3D View). 62 Proceed to the next exercise. For Top Constraint. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. for Base Offset. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. double-click 01 Entry Level. Under Constraints. and click OK. click 59 On the View toolbar. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. enter 300 mm. under Floor Plans. 56 Select the shaft. (SteeringWheels). 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. for Underlay. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. select 06 Roof. click Wall. 2 Right-click in the view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click View Properties. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Lines. and click Open View. 15 In the error dialog. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. select Elevation: South. and click (Fillet arc). 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. click Edit Profile. The exact placement is not important. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 16 On the Design Bar. click . click Remove Constraints. and then select the right face of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Go To View dialog. enter 9750. 17 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. click (Align). 7 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value.225mm Masonry.

select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. click . 22 In the Project Browser. and click (Circle).18 In the upper right corner of the profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.

and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views.

select M_RPC Tree .rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. select Planter : 1220 x 1220.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. between grid lines C and D.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. under Floor Plans. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. click Training Files.5 Meters. 6 In the Type Selector. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.4. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Component. click Component. and press ESC twice. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . 5 On the Basics tab. double-click 05 Roof Garden.

and on the Options Bar. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest.5 Meters. 14 In the Name dialog.5 Meters. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Floor. and then click OK twice. under Dimensions. 17 While pressing CTRL. 10 In the Project Browser.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. enter 1500 mm. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select the 2 remaining trees. enter 2400 mm. select M_RPC Tree . enter Japanese Cherry 1. for Height. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. click Duplicate. click Lines. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. 16 Click Apply. for Type.8 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 18 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 11 Select one of the trees. under 3D Views. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. View the roof. click (Default 3D View). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 21 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. as shown. and in the Type Selector. For Offset. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser.

28 Select the right vertical floor line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 26 On the Options Bar.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to place the line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. enter 0 mm. for Offset. and click to sketch a line. 29 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. click (Draw). 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line.

30 On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and click to finish the line. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor up 900 mm. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. clear Chain. 32 Press ESC. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend).

The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. for Height Offset from Level. as shown: (Element Properties). and click so he is facing the column. select M_RPC Male : Alex. In plan view. 43 Click OK twice. enter -250 mm. 42 In the Name dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. The completed sidewalk displays. 39 Select the sidewalk. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. enter Sidewalk. click Component. under Constraints. 48 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. for Type. click Duplicate. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. When you render an image. Next. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Edit/New. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 49 On the Options Bar.38 On the Design Bar. a photorealistic image displays. near Column E5. 45 Click OK. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 .

click the car. about 30 degrees. 54 In the Type Selector. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). click Camera. 56 Press ESC twice. 52 In the Type Selector. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE If necessary. 53 Move the cursor clockwise.

63 Click the sidewalk. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . Next. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. under 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. double-click To Building. 60 In the Project Browser. 65 Click the sidewalk. When you select a host for a component. If the sidewalk changes height. click Pick Host.59 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Constraints. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. double-click West. enter -300 mm. for Offset. 64 Select Alex. 66 Using the same method. click Pick Host.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. walls. you delete the entire stairwell. click 6 On the View toolbar.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click Training Files. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 4 Press DELETE. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels). 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. including the stairs. and shaft opening. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the View toolbar.

13 In the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. click OK. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. expand Groups. and click Create Instance. and zoom in to the linked instance. right-click m_RRB_core. double-click 00 Foundation. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. double-click 01 Entry Level. expand Model. under Floor Plans.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click (Align). and open Metric\m_RRB_core. and on the Design Bar.rvt. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and notice that the linked file is listed. 14 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Modify.

Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 18 Select the core. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. click Ungroup. or if the group layout is expected to change. click (top down view). click Modify. click 21 On the View toolbar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. (Default 3D View). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. ■ ■ Click grid line C.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. click Training Files. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. After you modify it. where it is hosted within a railing family. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. you add glass railings around the floor edges. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 Expand Railing. and Parapet.rvt. and expand Railings. 3 In the Conference project. and open Metric\m_Conference. and on the Options Bar. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. and click to split the floor. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. in the Project Browser. click Edit. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and double-click Lounge Perspective. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. click (Split). 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings.rvt. double-click 02 Level. The rendering displays. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. under Floor Plans. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . Handrail only. expand Renderings. press and hold CTRL. click OK. click Training Files. expand Families. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. The floor sketch displays. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and select Glass.

20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. verify that Chain is not selected. 18 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment.15 On the Design Bar. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 25 Select grid line B. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Lines. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. click (Align). 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and on the Options Bar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and click to draw another line. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click to place it.

36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click (Align).26 Select grid line D. 29 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Railing Properties. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100 mm. Lock the dimensions. select Glass. click Railing. for Type. 33 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click OK. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 31 In the Revit dialog. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. For Offset. and lock the alignment. click Finish Sketch. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 30 On the Design Bar.rvt project. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D.

39 Click Finish Sketch. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.37 On the Design Bar. click Camera.

A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

slight modifications to the building design have been made. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. 153 . and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. lofty ceilings. balconies. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. NOTE For training purposes. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. and a roof garden. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits.

154 .

you learn how to create views from a building model. how to create section and elevation views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. including plan. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. section. 155 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. You learn how to create new views from existing views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans.

156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. click Training Files. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

2 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.

hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 11 Under Floor Plans. Next. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. and click 1: 1000. 13 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. click the current scale. and click OK.

All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 16 Right-click.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. select Elevation: Building Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Elevation. for Scale. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.

15 On the Options Bar. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South East. select 1:100. and double-click Level 1. click Section. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. under Elevations. select Section: Building Section. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). expand Floor Plans. and click OK. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. 14 In the Type Selector.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

using the blue circular drag grip. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. and double-click Section 1. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. expand Sections (Building Section). click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. To create each view.

Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Floor Plan. double-click Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Callout Views | 167 . click Callout.rvt. select 1:50. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. for Scale. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Resulting callout view .

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the callout boundary.

enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 9 In the Rename View dialog. select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Callout Views | 169 . for Scale. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. select Detail View: Detail. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Section 1. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 13 In the Type Selector.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 . expand Detail Views (Details). 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK.17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.

You change the appearance of the section mark head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and click Open. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.rvt.rfa. double-click Level 1. the elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. select Custom-Section Head. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

19 Click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click Load into Project. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select the section line. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. for Section Head. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. select Section Head . 22 In the Name dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. scroll to Section Line. click Duplicate. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.Custom. enter 12. and select 3. and click OK. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 17 Under Category. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the floor plan. enter Section Head – Custom.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. clear any others. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click the Annotation Objects tab. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Section Tail . and click OK. and can be applied to the section line. 8 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. scroll to Section Marks. and select 2. 12 For Section Tag.Filled. . Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 15 Under Category. and click OK. Section Tail – Filled. select the current project. and click OK.5mm Square. On the floor plan.

for Elevation Tag. and on the Options Bar. On the floor plan. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. For Dimensions ➤ Width. open Metric\Families\Annotations. . enter 6 mm. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select 12. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. and click OK. 39 Click OK twice. Click OK. select Custom-Callout Head. click Edit/New.5 mm. select Square. 27 Click OK twice. select the callout. clear all others. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project. click Duplicate.23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 40 Press ESC. notice the square elevation markers that display. 34 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. for Callout Tag. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select 3. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 30 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Training Files. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. For Line Weight. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.5mm Square. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter 12. For Corner Radius. . Click OK. select the current project. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.

and select 7. and select 4. expand Callout Boundary. scroll down to Callout Boundary. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. masking regions. 49 Click OK. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . You learn to create view templates. click the Annotation Objects tab. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. and visual overrides. 43 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Dash. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Under Category. filters. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. view regions. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Show Crop Region). and features blue triangular grips and break marks. and double-click East. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click Zoom to Fit. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click (Hide Crop Region).rvt. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. under Elevations. To accomplish this. The crop region displays as red. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View Control Bar. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. and apply it to multiple elevation views.Creating a View Template In this exercise. 6 On the View Toolbar.

click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. clear Entourage. under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. elevation markers.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. and section lines are now hidden in the view. levels. 11 Under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. Callouts. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a View Template | 177 . grids.

and click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Create View Template From View. 20 Using the same method. under Elevations. and click Apply View Template. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click OK. 15 In the New View Template dialog.rvt. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click North. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. right-click North. and click OK. right-click East. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .14 In the Project Browser. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Elevations. edit the crop region as before. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Apply. 18 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. double-click Penthouse. Under View Depth. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. right-click. under Extents. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. select Level Below (Level 4). View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Properties. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. select Penthouse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for View Range. for Bottom. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. for Level. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4).

select Level 4. click Edit. select Roof Plan. double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. for View Range. Click OK twice. under Extents. for Level. under Floor Plans. for Bottom. Under View Depth. select Level 4. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 6 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

for Bottom. click Finish Sketch. select Unlimited. click Edit. 11 On the Options Bar. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . click Plan Region. 10 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Click OK twice. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. click Lines. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 13 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for View Range. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. for Level. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Move you cursor diagonally.

You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click the Filters tab. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. After you apply the filter. the fire rating of the walls. in this case. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify. and double-click Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.17 On the Design Bar.rvt. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.

and click OK. for Pattern. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Enter Hr. under Projection/Surface. click Remove. and click OK. click Edit/New. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Filters. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 9 Click OK. for Color. 11 Select Rated Walls. under Basic colors. select Walls. select Solid Fill. 7 In the Filters dialog. click (New). for Rated Walls. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. select Fire Rating. and apply a color. under Categories. click Add. 5 In the Filters dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click Override under Patterns. enter Rated Walls. and click OK. click OK. Select contains. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. 17 Using the same method. click <No Override>. select the red color. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 .

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.

NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 9 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region. and click OK. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Masking Region. select Invisible lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. and click Rename. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 8 Select the crop region.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu.rvt. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 4 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 5 On the View menu. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. as shown.

click (Rectangle). 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.12 On the Options Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.

click black. 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. for Pattern. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 .Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 11 Click OK twice. 7 Under Cut. click in the Patterns field. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. select Solid fill. click the current scale.rvt. and click OK. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. and click Override. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click <No Override> to apply a color.Level 1. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click Unit 18 Plan . right-click. and click OK. under Visibility. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Walls. and click 1: 50.

click Modify. under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. clear Floors. clear Grids. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 Under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click.

24 In the Line Graphics dialog.20 Right-click. 21 Under Projection/Surface. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click OK. select Dash. under Lines. click a purple color. click Override. click <No Override> to apply a color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. for Pattern. for Color. right-click. 25 Click OK twice. select the sofa. click Projection Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.28 For Color. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . and click OK twice. click By Category Override. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 29 In the Color dialog. 32 Select one of the lamps. click . select a bright green color.

click .33 On the View Control Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.

and click View. select A0 metric. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet.rvt. right-click.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.Creating Sheets. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.

3 In the Project Browser. enter A101. For Sheet Name. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 7 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Sheet Number. click Modify. enter Site Plan. click Modify. and select the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .Unnamed. Click OK.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . on the Options Bar. 5 When the title block highlights.

Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . For Project Number. under Other.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. The new project information displays in the titleblock. MA 12345 12 Click OK. Smith. 2009. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter For Approval. enter 2009-1. enter 15 May. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. For Client Name. enter J. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 14 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Edit. for Project Address.

Elevations A106 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Rename. right-click. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Elevations A107 . enter Floor Plan. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select A0 metric.Stairs In the following exercise. you add views to these sheets. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . for Name. and click Save.rvt.Sections A108 . and click OK. select the new sheet name.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Elevations A105 . and click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.

under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. and drag it to the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . select Level 1. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Floor Plan. and click to place the view. double-click A102 . double-click A104 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. click Modify.Elevations.

Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). double-click A107 . 12 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Modify. and click to place it.

. move the cursor over it. select 1:5. and on the Options Bar. for View Scale. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . 16 Select title bar. and press TAB until it highlights. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. zoom in to the grip.

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Under Floor Plans.Stairs. under Floor Plans. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A108 .Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click Level 1. under Sheets (all).

rvt. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A107 . and click Activate View. 5 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). In order to do this. click Modify. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and press ENTER.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. right-click.Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . you must first activate the view on the sheet. 2 Select the building section view. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. enter 16700 mm.

double-click North. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 In the Project Browser. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Deactivate View. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 Right-click. After you create the sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You modify the view to hide the view title.

double-click Level 1. enter T. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the camera as shown. select A0 metric. click Camera. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 .Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Click OK. and click Properties. The camera view displays.

13 In the Project Browser. Under Extents. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 14 Under 3D Views. 11 On the View Control Bar. double-click T . Under Camera. select Far Clip Active. For Target Elevation. for Eye Elevation. enter 100000 mm. enter 1500 mm.Title Sheet.8 On the Options Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 18000 mm. For Far Clip Offset. under Sheets (all). click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 12 On the View Control Bar. Click OK.

for Show title. under Graphics. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 19 Select the view on the sheet. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 635 mm. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify. for Height. click Size.15 With the view selected. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. Click Apply. enter Viewport/no title mark. 22 In the Name dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select No. Under Model Crop Size. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and click OK. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. click Training Files. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. Because of the open style floor plan.rvt. such as doors and windows. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as room and window schedules. 207 . you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. You also learn to create different types of schedules. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Objects In this lesson. expand Floor Plans.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial.

right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. and click Room and Area. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Separation. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan.

7 On the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 .6 Using the same method. click Modify.

type U18-1. and the rectangle contains the room tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click it. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 14 For Offset. and select the room tag. The room tag number displays in blue. click Training Files. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click to place the room and tag. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that Tag on placement is selected. 16 On the Design Bar.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. indicating that it can be edited. click Room. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. type 2400 mm. click Modify. and press ENTER.

18 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. click Room. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Click to place the new room and tag. 22 Click the room text label. Dining. type Entry. place rooms and tags. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. type Kitchen. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and press ENTER. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar.

on the Model Categories tab. clear Room Separation. and moving clockwise. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Tag. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 29 On the Design Bar. The rooms are already placed. click Modify. and click OK.Level 2. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. but they need to be tagged. 27 On the Design Bar. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans.

rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. you learn how to place door and window tags.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. expand Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser.rvt. clear Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 11 Using the same method. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. click New. for room 101. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 .Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 103. select Corridor. 101-106. For 104. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The room Number is U17-46. For 102. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. type Storage. select Storage. add 5 more rooms. for Name. type Corridor. For 105.

you add room separation lines. For Room Separation. place rooms from a program list. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. click Override. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and press ENTER. 4 Click OK twice. under Projection/Surface. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. select 9. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. type Stair. 13 Save the file. Under Custom colors. In the Lines field. under Visibility. and click OK. click the bright green swatch. click the Lines field. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and modify room names. expand Lines.■ For 106.rvt. click the Color field. For Weight. In the Line Graphics dialog.

click Room Separation. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. First. draw the horizontal line. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Modify.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

for Room. for Room. 14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 101 Building Entry.

as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . place the following rooms. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Level 1. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 16 Using the same method. 19 In the Project Browser.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. under Floor Plans. click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor. under Schedules/Quantities. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule.

24 Open the Room Schedule. under Available fields. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Base Finish. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click 23 On the Design Bar. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. while pressing CTRL. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. and Wall Finish. under Category. and for all 3 finishes. for Rows. under Constraints. 31 For Key Name. clear Room Bounding. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. Floor Finish. select Rooms. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 30 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). and click OK. 27 Select Schedule keys. click Modify. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. type Units. click New. type As Selected. and click Add.

37 Open the Room Schedule. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 43 In the Filter dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. for Room Style. 38 Under U17-8. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Available fields.32 Using the same method. select Units. under Other. select Units. and click Add. select Rooms. for Room Style. select Room Style. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 44 On the Options Bar. 36 Click OK twice. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 33 In the Project Browser. click (Element Properties). right-click Room Schedule. and click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. click (Filter Selection). for Fields. click Edit. 42 On the Options Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. type Room Type. at the warning prompt. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.rvt.46 Open the Room Schedule. for Name. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click the Color Scheme field. and double-click Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Room Style. 48 Save the file. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 9 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. right-click Level 1. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. under Graphics. 104. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and click Properties. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Service. click OK. type Room Type. select Public. under Views (all). and 106. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. for Color. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. For rooms 102 and 105. click OK. 103. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click 5 For Title. (Duplicate).

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Edit. expand Lines. click Color Scheme Legend. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit Color Scheme. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select the color legend. select Room Type. 17 On the Design Bar. click the value in the Color column. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. clear Visible. 14 Click OK twice. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and clear Room Separation. under Schemes. under Visibility. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Modify. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 On the Options Bar.

on the Options Bar. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 24 Click OK. and click OK. 28 Under Title Text. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 27 In the Type Properties dialog. (Element Properties). select blue. 23 Using the same method. click Modify. for Size. for Swatch Width. type 5 mm. under Graphics. click Edit/New. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. type 25 mm.22 In the Color dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. respectively. under Custom color. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Click OK twice.

position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. click Edit. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . 35 Click OK twice. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Sections. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. select Room Type. under Sections. select Rooms. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Visibility. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click Building Section. click Color Scheme Legend. double-click Building Section. and select Properties. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Color Scheme. under Graphics.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None. 41 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. (Filter Selection). 46 Click . under Identity Data. click . and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. select Public. select Rooms.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and click OK. under Identity Data. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 While pressing CTRL. select Units.

select Service. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . for Room Style. and click OK. double-click Room Style Schedule. for Rows. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 54 While pressing CTRL. click New. under Schedules/Quantities. 51 On the Options Bar.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. type Suites. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. excluding the stairwell spaces. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. under Key Name for the new row. under Identity Data. and click .

55 Click . for Room Style. The color fill extends to the roof. The color fill will extend to the roof. select Suites. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. under Volume Computations. and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. but not beyond it. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. verify that At wall finish is selected. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Areas and Volumes. select the room on the left side of the top floor. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 59 Under Room Area Computation.

for Upper Limit. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). under Constraints. select the stairwell room. 67 On the first level. 72 On the Design Bar. . and the living room. 71 Click OK. the dining room. under Constraints. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 65 For Limit Offset. type -254 mm. click Modify. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 2. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 .Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. for Upper Limit. 68 Click . 66 Click OK. select Loft. type 0. 70 For Limit Offset.0.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.73 Save the file. double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under 3D Views.

EPDM.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . select Family and Type. For Then by. 9 Using the same method. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 While pressing CTRL. 5 On the Design Bar. select Roofs. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. click Modify. and click Add. Select Grand totals. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Clear Itemize every instance. and click OK. select Material: Description. click Family and Type. under Available fields. under Category. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building.

under Other. select Calculate totals. click Edit. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. click Estimated Cost.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Area.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and click Properties. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 23 For Field formatting. select Material: Cost. and click Add. for Fields. 21 Click OK. select Calculate totals. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. for Material: Cost. click the Formatting tab.40 50. 19 For Type. select Currency. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 17 Click Calculated Value. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 20 For Formula. 12 Click OK. Under Field formatting. under Available fields. and click OK twice. and under Fields. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. type Estimated Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.

for Rounding. either within family components or within the project template. tag the line.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. 27 In the Format dialog. 30 Click OK twice. and are defined and stored in an external file. 29 Select Use digit grouping.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. select $. 31 Save the file. In this lesson. you create an exiting plan for the building. for Currency. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Digit grouping. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. creating a generic tag to tag the family. and reporting the shared parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. You draw a travel path line. 28 For Unit symbol. not just for currency. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. adding the shared parameters to a family. and schedule the total distance of each path. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. click the Format value. can be used for any number-based parameter. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 26 In the Project Units dialog. regardless of category. which inserts commas after every three digits. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. you create a shared parameter file. ensuring consistency across families and projects.

3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. for Type of Parameter.rvt. under Groups. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New. type Travel Distance. 9 Under Parameters. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. type Path ID. for File name.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. select Length. 7 Under Parameters.txt. for Name. click New. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click Create. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name.rvt. 11 Click OK twice. and click Save. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and click OK. type Exiting. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. for Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click Training Files. click Training Files.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. select Shared parameter.rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. and click Select. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and select Instance. Click Training Files. following the equals symbol (=). 15 If necessary. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . in the Load into Projects dialog. under Parameters. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. and click OK. click Family Types. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. 11 Click OK. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 13 Click Apply. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 10 Using the same method. otherwise the family loads into the current project. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Travel Distance Formula. and click OK. under Dimensions.rfa. for Group parameter under. 8 Select Instance. and click OK. under Parameters. group it under Dimensions.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. type Length. click Load into Projects. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. If you have multiple projects open. 9 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameter Type.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameter Data. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Add. select Constraints. 3 On the Design Bar.

252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Travel Distance. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. select Travel Distance. under Category Parameters. click Select.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. click Label. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click parameter(s) to label). and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.rft. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Add Parameter). and click OK. click Label. click Training Files. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes.

34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and click OK. and press DELETE. 33 On the Design Bar. select Path ID. 29 In the drawing window. and click Save. 32 In the Save As dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.28 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.rfa. 35 Save the file.rvt is selected. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and move it down. for File Name. click Modify. type M_Travel Distance Tag. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.

above the exterior door as shown. After the lines are tagged. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 4 On the Options Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. select Chain. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.rvt. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. click Component.Level 1. double-click Exiting Plan .Tagging. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Placing. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.

click Tag ➤ By Category. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . 13 While pressing CTRL. and click (Element Properties). Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. click Component. 10 On the Options Bar. for Path ID. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and click OK.7 Move the cursor down. type 1-1. move the cursor near the right corner. click Modify. clear Leader. select the 2 dashed travel lines. verify that Chain is selected. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. under Constraints. click Modify.Level 2. 12 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. double click Exiting Plan . through the door. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click outside of the building. Placing.Tagging. 11 Select each of the travel path lines.

21 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. and click in the stair. and click. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

for Path ID. under Category. under Constraints. type Level 1 Exit Distance. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Placing. 26 Select each of the travel path lines.24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK. click Modify. 30 Using the same method. 27 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 33 For Name. type 2-1. and click OK. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. . 28 While pressing CTRL. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 .

38 For Sort by. for Filter. under Other. in the second field. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Edit. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Properties. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. type Level 2 Exit Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt. 41 Under Fields. and under Field formatting. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select contains. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Schedules/Quantities. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the first field. 36 For Filter by. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 50 Save the file. while pressing CTRL. select Path ID. in the third field. 44 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. under Available fields. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. select Calculate totals.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Path ID. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click the Filter tab. click Training Files. type 1-. type 2-. for Filter by. 42 Click OK. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. and click OK. and in the third field. 49 Click OK twice.

9 Click OK twice. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click . and click OK. 10 In the schedule. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.152 mm. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. click the Value field.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the following fields.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . and click Properties. expand C . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Fixed Partitions. right-click the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .Interiors ➤ C10 . 4 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Identity Data.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and select C1010145 . right-click Generic .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . select Walls. under Categories. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities. for Assembly Code.Partitions .

1 On the File menu. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 8 In the New Database dialog.11 Close the exercise file. and click Next. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. the database display may be different than that shown. and click OK to create the database.mdb). 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the File Data Source tab. under Database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 6 Click Finish. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 11 Click OK 3 times. click OK. and click Next. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 3 Click New. 9 Under Directories. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. for Database Name. click Training Files. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access.rvt. type Revit_Project. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select a location for the database file.mdb. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Create.

so that each table of elements includes an Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. in addition to the Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 13 Close the exercise file. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Additionally. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. For example. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.

262 .

you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 263 . You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. 297 . In the callout view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you trace over the building model geometry. In order to detail from the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and metal studs. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. add detail components. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.

click Training Files. double-click the detail callout head. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. After you add components. Exact location is not important. region objects. You load detail components. you detail the view of the roof edge. click Detail Component. which means that all detail components. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and insulation objects. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rfa. 5 In the alert dialog. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and click Open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the drawing area. select As underlay. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. as well as detail lines. They are also view specific. and click OK. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rvt. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. The roof overhang detail displays. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

17 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. enter 406. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 16 Click OK twice. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Delete the component. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 13 In the Name dialog. click Modify. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. and click OK. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. Detailing the View | 299 . for Pattern ➤ Detail. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties).5mm. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Repeating Detail. 10 On the Options Bar. select Corrugated Metal. 15 For Spacing. click Duplicate. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.

Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Type Selector. and click Open. and on the Edit toolbar.rfa. click Training Files. click Load. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Detail Component. click (Move). Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.

Detailing the View | 301 .Because you still have several components to load. 30 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Detail Component. click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. click Training Files. press SPACEBAR 3 times.rvt. 33 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and place it in the detail view as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 31 To properly orient the component. and click Open. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.

38 Select the horizontal segment.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Modify. select Chain. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click the Flip instance arrows.

click (Move). Detailing the View | 303 . enter 140mm. click Insulation. ■ Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click Detail Component. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. For Offset. 42 Click Modify. select to near side. as shown.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar.

select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. meaning they display only in this view. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Like detail components. 47 In the Type Selector. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. you add lines to your detail. select Thin Lines. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.rvt. they are view specific. as shown. click Detail Lines. 51 Click Modify.45 In the Type Selector.

click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select Medium Lines. For Offset. and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. click Detail Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines | 305 . as shown. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. as shown. select Thin Lines.4 Click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar.

Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 16 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click (Draw).

Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Thin Lines. 22 In the Project Browser. select Do not display. right-click. click Detail Lines. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. For Offset. select Vapor Barrier. and click Properties. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 26 In the Type Selector. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select the Penthouse level line. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . When you turn the display model off. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 24 On the View Control Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail).18 In the Type Selector.

you add text notes to complete the detail. click Detail Component. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select M_Break Line. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Click Modify.29 On the Design Bar. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Text. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Dimension. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes | 309 . click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Enter the text. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click Modify. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Click again to specify the location of the text box.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.

Creating Detail Components on page 310. click Select All Instances. and press DELETE. click Roof Overhang Detail. under Text Fields. right-click. for Suffix. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Roof Overhang Detail . 3 In the Rename View dialog. (Filter Selection).rvt. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click OK. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. enter Typ. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. right-click. and click the dimension text. and click Rename.. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. right-click. select a text note. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).7 Select the dimension line. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. on the Options Bar.Keynotes. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Training Files. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 16 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. and click Open. pressing TAB. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Type Selector. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. select all the coping linework. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.7 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify. and selecting the chain. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.rft. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. select Medium Lines. Creating Detail Components | 311 .

double-click it in the Project Browser. 31 Using the same method used previously. While pressing SHIFT. enter Roof Edge. 24 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component.rfa. delete the underlying linework. select the coping. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you place keynotes on objects. click Load. 26 Press DELETE. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 23 Using a window. 28 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Modify.Keynotes view is not the open view. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. click Training Files. The original linework remains selected. click . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 21 To place the component. 30 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. and click Open. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog. click Load into Projects. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. and click Save. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 27 On the Design Bar. for File name.18 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. clear Detail Items. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Detail Component. Adding Keynotes on page 312. and the component can be placed in the detail. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Click to place the leader arm. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. select the metal fascia with drip edge. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19mm Plywood. 2 In the alert dialog. use keynote 06160. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. For the metal coping. 63mm Rigid Insulation.rvt.C1. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. and click Open. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. In the Keynotes dialog.D11. 6 Click Modify.B5. Roof Edge4. (Element Properties). click Keynote ➤ Element. click Training Files. click Edit/New.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Keynotes | 313 . and click OK. use keynote 07645. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.

use keynote 09250.G1.9 In the Type Properties dialog.F1. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 50 x 150. 17 Keynote the component.A8. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. click Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. FasciaProfile_1. and click . select Corrugated Metal. 11 Click OK 3 times. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 18 Save the file. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.F1. For the 50 x 300.20 Ga. use keynote 06110. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.D11. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06110.I1.D1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 50 x 200. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06160. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 12 On the Design Bar. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. use keynote 06110. click in the Value column. You do this in order to keynote the component. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. using keynote 07460.

click Training Files. 5 In the drawing area. click Load. click Training Files.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Press DELETE. for File name. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 15 Click Modify. 19 In the Name dialog. and select the right end point. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Select the component.rft. click Edit/New. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 24 While pressing CTRL.rvt. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. and click Open. 20 Click OK 3 times. select Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Modify. and click Open. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. select the left end point of the reference line. 6 Lock the line. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Duplicate. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 13 In the Type Selector. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. navigate to your preferred location. 9 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar.

and assign it keynote 06110. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 On the Design Bar. and click . 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and click . 30 Click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. and hidden) used in the view.25 Next.G1. and click . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. and click OK. 41 Select the component just added. 40 Click Modify. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 28 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click the lower end at the break line. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and assign it keynote 07260. click Duplicate. 46 Click Modify. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click Detail Component. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 34 In the Name dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 29 In the drawing area.A1.A5. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 31 Select the component. click in the Value column. invisible. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 Using the same method used previously. enter EPDM Membrane. 38 On the Design Bar. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 37 Click OK 3 times. 47 Select the component. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click (Move). against the 19mm plywood. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click Edit/New. 49 With the component selected. click Detail Component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 42 Using the same method used previously.

54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 52 In the Type Selector. 55 Click Modify.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar. select Chain. and click . leaving the detail component lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. click Detail Component.

select Invisible Lines. click Load into Projects. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector. 63 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 60 On the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Keynote ➤ Element. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. click Detail Component. name the component Vapor Barrier. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa.A4.rfa. select the component. 61 In the drawing area. 50 x 200 Framing. 67 In the Type Selector. and Vapor Barrier. Air Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07260.

name the component Batt Insul. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Keynote Table.txt.69 Select the component. Enter 07460. Enter 07463.A4. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.rvt. and assign it keynote 07210. and press TAB. and press ENTER. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.A1. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. add a keynote for the component. and click . and close the text editor. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes.. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.A9. The database file opens in a text editor. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Browse. 71 In the drawing area. and press TAB. 3 In the text editor. 70 Using the method used previously. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . 72 Save the file. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.

Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. click Keynote ➤ Element. 11 Click Modify. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click OK. you learn how to create a drafted detail. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 14 Save the file. and click Open.A1. Each keynote displays as a simple number. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click to place the note. In the Type Selector. navigate to 07463.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 9 In the drawing area. select Absolute. click to place the leader. select all the keynotes. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 13 Click Modify. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. under Path Type. After you create a drafting view. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. and click OK.

The detail is imported as an import symbol. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. verify that Auto . expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click OK. Click Open. For Colors. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . select 1 : 5. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.dwg.rvt. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. right-click Drafting 1. select Black and White. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. for Scale. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and click Rename. and click OK. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.Center to Center is selected. For Positioning. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.

11 In the Type Properties dialog. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 5 Click Modify. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 Select the callout. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. click Callout. and click Properties. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Edit/New. click Rename. 10 In the Rename dialog. 12 Click OK twice. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. enter Detail . for New. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. delete the existing value.No Reference. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Reference other view. 3 On the Options Bar.

Elev. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. click Modify. and double-click the callout.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar./Sect. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 18 Save the file.No Reference). under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . double-click A105 . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Det.

. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Duplicate. for Name. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK. and click OK. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Filled Region. enter Gyp. for Name. 11 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. select Gypsum-Plaster.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Region Properties. click Detail Component. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 14 Click OK 3 times. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Board. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt.

select the width dimension. 18 While pressing CTRL. select Wide Lines. click 22 On the Options Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . click . and on the Edit toolbar.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click (Draw). 17 Click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. (Mirror).5mm. 19 In the Type Selector. and enter 20.

click Filled Region. Move the cursor up. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 25 Click Modify. 30 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 33 Click OK 3 times. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Name. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter Wood . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.Finish. . click Edit/New. and click above the top of the region as the end point. select Wood . click Region Properties.Finish. 24 Select the mirrored region. click Duplicate.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar.

39 In the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. select Medium Lines. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 .34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click (Align). Draw a rectangle as shown. click Filled Region. 37 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). click . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. sketch the new region as shown. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 38 On the Design Bar.5mm. verify that the thickness is 19mm.

42 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and press ENTER. For Offset. enter 10mm. click Filled Region. and press ENTER. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 6mm. 47 Click the reference plane. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Ref Plane. click 48 Click Modify. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. (Align). 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar.

and select the bottom horizontal line. and click to select the point. click Finish Sketch. enter 0. For Offset. and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor left 25mm. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 54 On the Tools toolbar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor down 305mm. click (Trim/Extend). Select Chain. and press ENTER.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw).

68 Click Modify. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Training Files. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 65 On the Options Bar. 58 In the Type Selector.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 69 Select the bolt. enter 3mm. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Load. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. and press ENTER. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .2mm. 60 Select the left. 61 Click Modify. enter 76. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. top. For Offset.rfa. click Detail Component. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Lines. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and right edges of the door panel region.

73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. click Training Files. click Load. 71 On the Options Bar. use the images as a guide.70 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 76 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . and click Open. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. select Wide Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt.

and on the Edit toolbar. 87 Click Modify. 85 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 82 Select the rectangle. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. click . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.78 On the Design Bar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. click . select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. (Mirror).

88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 89 On the Design Bar. 92 Select the line. as shown. click Detail Lines. click (Mirror). 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 .

enter 3mm. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component. 101 On the Design Bar. 99 Click Modify. 95 On the Design Bar. select the length dimension. and click to place the arc as shown.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and press ENTER. 97 On the Options Bar. click . TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 102 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line.

select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. and click Modify. 108 In the Type Selector.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. click Dimension. 110 Select the dimension line. drag the text for the smaller dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 106 Click to place the dimension. 105 In the drawing area. 107 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.5mm Arial. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. using the Drag Text grip. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown.

118 Select Modify to end the command. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. click Dimension. 113 Under Text Fields. enter See Schedule.5mmArial. select Replace With Text. and click the dimension text. for Below. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. and then click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .2.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. select Replace With Text. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . under Dimension Value. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. under Dimension Value. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 114 Click OK.

130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Board. 125 In the Options Bar. 123 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 127 Enter Gyp. click Text. and on the Options Bar. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. and click Modify. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 126 In the drawing area. click to create an arced leader. select the gypsum board region on the left. and click to place the text. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 128 Select the note. click (Add Right Arc Leader).121 Click OK.

131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file.

Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. click Training Files. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. 339 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click East.rvt.

type 1. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 7 On the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the keynote. for Number of Leaders. click Modify.Hexagon. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.

for Text. on the Options Bar. click (Copy). 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Select the tag. and click above the tag to place the copy. Creating a Note Block | 341 .9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. under Identity Data. and click OK. type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Element Properties).

19 With the tag selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Repair existing door surround. and on the Options Bar. type B. and click. click (Element Properties). Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. (Mirror). position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 18 Using the same method.14 With the copy selected. 17 Click OK. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. on the Edit toolbar. click Copy. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. on the Options Bar. 15 For Text. 16 For Tag.

22 Optionally. click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. using the table as a reference. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. Remove all existing windows. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Repair existing door surround. Clean existing concrete loading dock.

for Sort by. select Exterior Construction Notes. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for the value. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 28 In the Project Browser.Elevations. On the Appearance tab. select Tag. type Description. expand Schedules/Quantities. Select Text. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. for Heading. type Mark. and double-click A103 . Create. and click Add. and click Add. for Note block name. type 6 mm. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. expand Sheets (all). On the Formatting tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. for Header text. and select Bold. 29 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. and for Alignment. verify that Arial is selected. Clean cut and repair wall as required. under Available fields. select Tag. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. format. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. select Center. 27 In the column header (text). type Exterior Construction Notes. 26 Click OK.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click T . 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 1 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . under Sheets (all).rvt. click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.

select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Number. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. type T. select Sheet Index. and click Add. in the first field. On the Filter tab. under Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet. and in the third field. expand Schedules/Quantities. Select Sheet Name. ■ 4 Click OK.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.Title Sheet. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. double-click T . and click Add. 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing list displays. select does not equal. 5 In the list title field. in the second field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and expand the right column to accommodate the text. under Available fields. for Filter by. for Sort by. select Sheet Number.

annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. doors. Training File Using Legends | 347 . you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. and door frames. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. click Modify. On construction documents. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. 11 Save the file. On construction documents. and so on). Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. door frame schedule. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.9 On the Design Bar. For the text. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. windows. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

click Symbol. click Edit/New.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view.rvt. click Duplicate. 6 On the Options Bar. type 3mm. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 9 For Text Font. and click OK. for Name. you create a text type with the necessary size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Open Level Head . type Typical Symbol Legend. and click OK. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type Legend Text. for Name. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click . 10 For Text Size. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Arial.

16 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Site Plan/Floor Plan. click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Legends. and for Leader.

select Viewport : No Titlemark. under Sheets. select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 23 Save the file. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.17 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 . 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify.Unit 18.

For View. and press ENTER. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 5 On the View Control Bar. type 900 mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 3 For Scale. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Legend Component. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Medium for Detail Level.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. For Host length. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select 1 : 50. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. for Name. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Section.

10 Select the second wall. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click Text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 12 In the Type Selector. click to add text without a leader. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.9 On the Design Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Modify. for Family. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 13 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. for Leader.

Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. click to add text with a single-segment leader. and drag it to the new sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. select Level 4. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and click New Sheet. 19 Type the following text. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Sheets (all). Creating a Component Legend | 353 . pressing ENTER between component descriptions.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 4. select 4th Floor Wall Types.25 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. click Modify to end the command. 29 In the Project Browser. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. drag it onto the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Legends.

select Detail Level: Medium. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. select the Wall Type 2 component. 35 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . indicating that it captured the wall type properties.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 34 Select the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.

Using the table. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence of revisions. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. contractor inquiries. or changes in building material availability. double-click Level 4. In this exercise.36 Optionally. These changes can be due to owner requests. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. under Floor Plans. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. click 37 Save the file. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . unanticipated changes in construction conditions.rvt.

type a date. 5 For Description. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. If Visible is not selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. if the active revision is number 1. If you select Per Sheet. yet as concise as possible. When Issued is selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When you use this option. verify that Per Project is selected. In most instances. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . 7 Under Show. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. For example. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. for Numbering. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. In general.

6 On the Design Bar. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. click (Move). 5 Select the divider. you make changes to the project floor plan. under Floor Plans. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor up. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 4. 9 Save the file. 3 Select the divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 4 On the Edit toolbar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.8 Click OK.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.

NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click near the partition you moved. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. In the Snaps dialog. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Snaps Off. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

16 Click OK. for Line Weight. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Save the file. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. select 6. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. you load a revision tag into the project. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

8 In the Tags dialog. double-click Level 4. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. scroll down to Revision Clouds. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Because you chose to number by project. the cloud is tagged as number 1. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. click Tag ➤ By Category. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and because the revision is the first in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 4 On the Options Bar. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. You then issue a revision. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. under Floor Plans. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . select Leader. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 10 In the drawing area. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog. click OK. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Training Files. you need to add one. click Tags. 11 Click to place the tag. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 12 Save the file.rvt.rfa. 6 Click Load. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.

7 For Description. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. you can no longer modify it. You do this by issuing the revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . with the description Relocate Door. under Sheets. 9 Click OK. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. and enter a date. select Issued. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. You can continue to add revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.Unnamed. and enter a date for the revision. 8 Add another revision row. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type Modify Paving Area. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE After you issue a revision. click Add. and click OK. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you prevent further changes to the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. double-click A107 .rvt.

12 In the drawing area. double-click A107 . Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. select Seq. under Sheets (all). 17 Using the same method learned previously. 20 On the Project Browser. 3 . 11 On the Drafting tab. 13 Click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 4. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 2 . click to add a revision clouds. 19 To add tags. select the revision cloud. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area.Modify Paving Area. select Tag ➤ By Category. apply Seq. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. Working with Revisions | 363 .Unnamed. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. in the drawing area.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select Revision Cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. for Revision.

Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Click Options. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You do this so that the revision can be changed. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. beginning with "D". 25 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. you edit the titleblock family. for Numbering. select Alphabetic. height. select the titleblock. For each revision. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. and rotation) to the revision schedule. delete the first 3 characters. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. clear Issued. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. for Sequence.

Select Outline. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and press DELETE. under Other. 34 On the Design Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. click Modify. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. for Appearance. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Edit. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Working with Revisions | 365 . click Load into Projects. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Edit Family. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the alert dialog. for Build Schedule. Select Grid lines. select Bottom-up. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area.27 On the Options Bar. and drag it above the schedule area. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Yes. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Yes. Clear Blank row before data. 33 Select the schedule header. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties.

for Rotation on Sheet. click Edit. and click Properties. right-click Revision Schedule. select User defined. open the titleblock family for editing.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 46 Click OK twice. under Other. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. for Formatting. for Height. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. With a user-defined height. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 40 Select the revision schedule header. When the height property is variable. select 90° Counterclockwise. for Heading. and on the Options Bar. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 45 On the Appearance tab. and the most current revisions display in the available rows.. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Rev. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select the revision schedule.

Importing from Other Applications | 367 . you learn to import information (such as images. text. click Yes. click Load into Projects. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 51 Save the file. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.

you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.Title Sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Importing Image Files In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click Text. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets.rvt. double-click T . 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. double-click T . Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click to add text without a leader.JPG. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Leader. click Modify. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. under Sheets. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 9 On the Design Bar. with the new text box still selected. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 6 Select the text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.doc text file in another window.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 11 Save the file. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.

Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 12 Save the file. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click Training Files. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. and click Save. for File name. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. double-click A102 . 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. This step has been completed for you. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .xls. This exercise demonstrates a common method.JPG. 5 Click OK. type Fixture Schedule. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG. click Modify.rvt. click Desktop. 3 In Microsoft Excel. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.Unit 18.mdi. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. for Name. This process may vary from system to system. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 4 Under Printer. under Sheets. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.

you break up the plan into sections. The large floor plan. or footprint. called dependent views. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 371 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. To effectively document this project.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.

and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 . 6 In the drawing area. and click Rename. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. select the crop region.Aviary. and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The dependent view opens. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 4 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 2. for Name. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. click Zoom To Fit.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. enter Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.10 Click in the drawing area. 14 Click in the drawing area. and click OK.Labs. for Name. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region.

Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click (Hide Crop Region). 20 Click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 .

Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . for Name. 33 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Level 2 Aviary. for Line Weight.Unnamed. click the Annotation Objects tab. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click Rename. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 27 Under Matchline. 31 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select 9. select Double Dash.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Floor Plans. click Level 2 .Aviary. and click OK. and drag it onto the sheet. expand Sheets. 28 For Line Pattern. and click OK. right-click A101 .

36 Use the same method to create another sheet. under Floor Plans.Aviary is selected. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. and place the Level 2 . for Target view. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click View Reference. double-click Level 2. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify.

click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. for Target view. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 44 On the Design Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs. click Zoom To Fit.

382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. double-click Level 2 . click the far right control. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click (Show Crop Region). 48 Select the crop region.46 In the Project Browser. 47 On the View Control Bar. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. under Floor Plans. after modifying the annotation crop region. 49 If.Aviary. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. right-click.

After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). expand Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 55 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. 51 On the View Control Bar. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. select all views in the list. and click OK. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). and click Apply Dependent Views. right-click Level 2. 54 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. under Floor Plans.

right-click South Elevation.57 On the Zoom flyout.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. and double-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.

3 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the view. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. enter South Elevation .The dependent view opens.Right. 9 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. select the Crop Region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. 11 Select the crop region. cropping the view to the lab building. for Name. enter South Elevation . 7 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 5 In the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region).Left. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. right-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. The perspective view displays. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.

right-click 3D View 1. as necessary. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. If the camera is not shown in the view. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and click Show Camera. and adjust the field of vision. double-click Site.3 Zoom out. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . Depending on camera placement. in the Project Browser. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. under Floor Plans. as shown. and select the crop boundary. With the camera shown.

8 In the Project Browser.6 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.Day. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. double-click Exterior . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click Rename. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Exterior . 10 Save the file. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. under 3D Views.Day to open the view.

double-click Exterior . You then duplicate the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Day. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. modify render settings.rvt.

You create a location and time for the rendering. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Lighting. select Spring Equinox. for Setting. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. for New. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Medium. and click Render.Santa Monica. select Edit/New. 7 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. In this case. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. for Sun. NOTE If a background image is required. 3pm. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 6 Click OK twice. 5 In the Rename dialog.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality. and click Rename. You adjust cloud settings as required. enter Spring Equinox . For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. under Background. select Sky: Cloudy.

For Files of type. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. click Export. Click Save. click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Desktop.png). click Show the model. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. select Portable Network Graphics (*.9 In the Rendering dialog. 10 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered.

under Ungrouped Lights.Flat Round : 60W . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. and click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Group Options. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . press and hold SHIFT. and click Move to Group. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.120V.Flat Round : 60W . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Night. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. for Name. right-click Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . enter Pool Lights. for Name. click OK. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. click Dialog). click Render. enter Pool House Lights.120V to the Pool Lights group. and select the last light.Flat Round : 60W . select the first light.Night. select Exterior: Artificial only. under Lighting. under Group Options. 22 Using the same method. add 30 :Sconce Light .Night view open. 16 With the Exterior . 25 Using the same method.Exterior . and click Artificial Lights. on the View Control Bar. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click New. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Day. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Day view to Exterior . To select a sequential list. verify that Pool Lights is selected. click New. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. dialog. for Scheme. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W .

and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. for Exposure Value.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. In this example. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . you change the brightness of the exposure. enter 4. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. click Adjust Exposure. After the image is rendered. under Image. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. 32 Save the file. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Show the model.

render the views.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and finally. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.rvt. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding RPC People In this exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.

under Floor Plans.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. ■ (Rotate). 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Adding RPC People | 413 . Exact placement is not important. 4 In the Type Selector. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. select RPC Female : YinYin. double-click Level 1. the person’s line of sight. and on the Edit toolbar. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click Component. 6 Select the figure. and place the component inside the pool house. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Cast Reflections. 14 Save the file. click (Element Properties). you can enable this option. click Modify. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. for Render Appearance Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. under Parameters. 12 Click OK 3 times. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. under Identity Data.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. By default. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Edit.

Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.

under Extents. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and click Properties. under 3D Views. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click OK.The perspective view displays. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. select Section Box.

select the section box. 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. under Floor Plans. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. in addition to the 3D view. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click Level 1.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 14 In the 3D view.

and render the interior view. doors that contain windows or glass. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and curtain walls. 17 Save the file. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. To create a daytime view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.15 Maximize the 3D view.

under 3D Views. click (Show Rendering Dialog). Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. and click OK. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Interior . clear Pool Lights. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 7 Under Quality.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.rvt. You can specify a lower quality. select Interior: Artificial only. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night. 3 On the View Control Bar. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. After these settings are established. 5 Click Artificial Lights. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. for Setting. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. select Draft. under Lighting. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Render. 4 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. you turn them off for this scene.

3pm. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night. The preset schemes are read-only. but the space will receive standard daylighting. click Copy To Custom. select Interior: Sun only. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 13 In the Rendering dialog. you must create a custom setting. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. By default they are turned off. and click Render. for Daylight Portal Options. and click OK.Day. for Scheme. (Show Rendering Dialog). Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. right-click Interior . for Sun. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.Santa Monica. select Region. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. select Edit. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . You create a view for the interior during the day. In this case.9 Close the Rendering dialog. click 14 For Setting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . in order to turn on daylight portals. the daylight portals can be turned on. select Spring Equinox . For sunlit interiors. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For more information on daylight portals. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. select Curtain Walls.

18 In the Rendering dialog. Click OK. click Adjust Exposure. and close the Rendering dialog. In the next steps. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Properties). enter 10. under Image. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 20 In the Rendering dialog. For Saturation. and on the Options Bar. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. enter 1. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. select the column on the right. click Show the model. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.

32 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . you can define the output and quality settings for final output. click the dimensions for Size. Click OK. 28 In the Rendering dialog. You change the varnish setting.22 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. and on the Options Bar. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For Width.6. For Bump. clear Region. add a bump map to create texture. select Unfinished. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Based on wood grain. select Scale (locked proportions). the render time increases significantly. for Setting. 26 Click Update Preview. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. under Output Settings. for Resolution. For Rotate. select Wood. and click Render. As size and DPI are increased. 24 In the Materials dialog. select High. select the crop boundary. and click OK. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. click OK. enter 5''. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. enter 90. For Amount. 23 With the column still selected. select Printer. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. or section view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Usually. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.The rendered image displays. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. The walkthrough path is a spline. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. independent of the Revit Architecture software. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. In a plan view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. but you can also define it in a 3D. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. elevation.

proceeds through the dining room. click Training Files. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and double-click 1st Floor. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. verify that Perspective is selected. and open Common\c_Townhouse. If you prefer to use metric values. and change unit formats as desired. click Walkthrough. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and click the tab in the context menu. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

and double-click Walkthrough 1. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.

verify that Field of view is selected. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click the dimensions for Size. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . If it is not. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 16 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). for Frame. and select the crop boundary. enter 16''. on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 17 Click . enter 1. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. for Width. and for Height. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 9''. select the crop boundary. 12 On the View menu. 14 Click . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 11 Under Change.

The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Extents. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. clear Far Clip Active. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. double-click 1st Floor. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Floor Plans. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428.rvt. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and click OK. c_Townhouse. press ESC. click Edit Walkthrough.The walkthrough plays. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.

Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the third key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path.

c_Townhouse. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Walkthrough 1. on the Options Bar. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and click OK. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. When you export the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. specifying the number of frames. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. reducing the size of the image. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 Under Format. under Walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. for Frames/sec. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 9 To play the walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. select <Shading>. or rendering. and click Save. enter 15. The walkthrough is recorded. for Compressor. shading. click Edit Walkthrough. under Output Length. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. for Model Graphics Style. hidden line. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. . click File menu ➤ Save As. If you are unsure of what option to use. shading with edges.

Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. 431 . A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. In this tutorial. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. More specifically. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.

you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and double-click 01 Entry. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. 4 On the View toolbar.Courtyard View In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . (SteeringWheels). A 3D view is created. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. expand Views (all). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.Creating a Solar Study . click Camera. 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. click shown. expand Floor Plans.

click Modify.Courtyard View. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and click OK. as shown. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Save As. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. double-click 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. 9 On the File menu. click Section. 7 In the Project Browser. if necessary. enter Solar Study . Create section 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section cutaway view. and click Rename.5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 6 Click the view boundary to select it.

Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click Modify. double-click the section head. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 7 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click OK. expand Sections. right-click Section 1. as shown. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 6 To view the section. click . 11 On the SteeringWheel. 13 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. (SteeringWheels). click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar.

Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Save. under 3D Views. 18 On the File menu. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click . and click Rename. 6 In the Rename View dialog. you create a plan cutaway view.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. including the house. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. then Fine. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. double-click 01 Entry. In some cases. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 17 To hide the section box. 16 On the View Control Bar. Typical plan views. then select Medium. do not display many elements in 3D. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site.14 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click {3D}. 5 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. as shown. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. such as floor plans and ceiling plans.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. click Modify. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 15 Select the Roof. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click (SteeringWheels).8 On the View toolbar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.

17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 20 On the View Control Bar. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Save. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. and preview the effects of each study as an animation.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. and click Rename. under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 21 On the File menu.

Click the Single-Day tab. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. CA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click . 5 Click the Single-Day tab. date range. enter Summer Solstice. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. Los Angeles. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 9 In the Name dialog. For the Single-Day solar study.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. For this study. for City. 2 On the View Control Bar. 10 Under Place. MA. you specify the location. . or multi-day solar study. click click OK.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. You can create a still. and click OK. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . For the Multi-Day solar study. you specify the location. select Los Angeles. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. expand Views (all). 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand 3D Views. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. and time range. leave the slider at 50. and time. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. date.Boston. 4 For Sun Position. single-day.Creating Solar Studies . USA. click . USA is selected.

Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. enter Winter Solstice. For Time Range. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Los Angeles. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Los Angeles. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. and click OK. 14 In this case. and click Duplicate. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. for Date. and click OK. select Winter Solstice. Under Frame. click . 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Sun Position. 2008. enter 20 and press ENTER. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . Los Angeles is selected. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. on the Single-Day tab. click Save. 19 On the File menu. 16 In the Name dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 6 On the View Control Bar. Clear Ground Plane at Level. ■ For Time Interval. 2008. enter 10 and press ENTER. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. select June 22. 8 On the Options Bar. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. select December 22.

click . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click . click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. . on the Single-Day tab. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click To display the next sequential frame. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click To play the animation from start to finish. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. double-click 01 Entry. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified.■ To display the next key frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. . under Floor Plans. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. . for Sun Position. 14 On the Options Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. approximately as shown. The solar study animation plays.

Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 8 For Sun Position. Click and enter Dining. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. expand 3D Views. click . On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. as shown. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click .

Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Single-Day tab. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. and enter 5 to 50. if necessary. click OK. and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. 11 To display the section box. 15 To hide the section box. and click OK. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Output Length. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Section Boxes. ■ For Frames per second. select Frame Range.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. as shown. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 Click outside of the section box. clear Section Boxes.

5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. To view the animation.■ ■ Under Format.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Winter Solstice. Under Format. Los Angeles. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. and click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. you open each image. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select AVI Files. for Model Graphics Style. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically.Los Angeles. 3 For Sun Position. select Frame Range. 2 On the View Control Bar. on the Single-Day tab. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. enter 450 in the first field (width). verify that the value is set to 15. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. or frame. for Compressor. For Dimensions. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. click OK. click . For Frames per second. and enter 5 to 10. For Files of Type. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Click OK. of the animation separately. for Model Graphics Style. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. To maintain the proportions of the frame. For File Name. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. under Output Length. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Save. For File name. For Files of Type. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. such as JPEG. as shown: 9 On the File menu. enter 450 in the first field (width). it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. TIFF. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. In this example. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.■ For Dimensions. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. or any single-frame format. Click OK. select PNG. under 3D Views.Los Angeles. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. depending on the Frame Range. BMP.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 8 Click Save. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. click the Desktop icon. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. or GIF. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. On the Annotation Categories tab. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. USA.Week Interval. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For Time Interval. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. for Sun Position. clear Section Boxes.Boston. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Duplicate. click the Multi-Day tab. 5 Select the roof. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. select One week. and click OK. and on the View Control Bar. for File name enter 2pm . 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . specify 2:00 pm. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 8 On the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . For Time. click OK. MA.

and click OK.West or North .South. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. you mirror all model elements. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Click the Desktop icon. and click Save. In the Length/Format dialog. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. for Compressor. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. When you mirror a project. such as East . Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and annotations in non-drafting views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. for File Name. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. model views. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 17 On the View Control Bar. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. click OK.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Then. 6 On the Standard toolbar. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.West. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. under 3D Views. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click OK.West axis. and click OK. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. For additional information. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. select the roof. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 5 In the warning dialog. In this exercise. select East .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. The project is mirrored along the East . right-click.

and click OK. click . specify 11:00 AM for time. select Cast Shadows. For example. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. select Summer Solstice. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 For Sun Position. click . Orienting to True North | 449 . click Apply. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. on the Still tab. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Still tab. 11 For Sun Position. 12 Under Date and Time. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 8 For Sun Position. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 10 Under Date and Time. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. and click OK. click . change the time back to 12:00 PM.

click OK. select True North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). the view settings must be set for True North. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. and click OK. When a project is started. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. click OK.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Still tab. right click 01 Entry. and select Winter Solstice. click . 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 For Sun Position. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 14 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. and click Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

as shown.■ To establish the True North direction. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . The floor plan rotates in the view. click toward the top of the screen.

Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. right-click. right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. enter True North Orientation. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Element Properties. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. under 3D Views. select True North Orientation. click the Still tab. right-click 01 Entry. 32 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. select Project North. and click Rename. 25 In the Project Browser. click . for Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click OK. 27 In the Rename View dialog. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 33 For Sun Position. and click Properties. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 28 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. and click OK. and click OK.23 In the Project Browser. select True North. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

For File Name. For Files of Type. for Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Click OK. click the Single-Day tab. under Format. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Los Angeles. Orienting to True North | 453 . In the Length/Format dialog. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Click Save. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. and click OK.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 600 in the first field. click Summer Solstice. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. verify that AVI Files is selected.

For Sun. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. under 3D Views. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Rendered views do not have this limitation. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. under Quality. and click Duplicate. select Medium. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. for Scheme. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. for Date and Time. In the Name dialog. capturing it. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Edit/New. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. select 12/22. under 3D Views. and 2:00 PM. Under Lighting. and click OK. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. for Setting.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. In this exercise. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). under Settings. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Interior: Sun only.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Since a rendered image is temporary. click Render. select Winter Solstice. and exporting it as a JPEG image.

click Export. and click Save. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. click Save to Project.6 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . click Desktop. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. verify that JPEG Files is selected. For Files of type.

456 .

Other tools in the software. For the realistic approach. In this series of exercises. a consultant. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Co-house. you explore the stylistic approach. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Whether the audience is the general contractor. type. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. In this tutorial. and section boxes. or the client. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. an outside reviewer. They include rendering. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. length. however. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Using the pre-built building model. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. sections. 457 . linework. you can choose between realism and stylistics. When organizing presentation graphics. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. and details. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. elevations. advanced model graphics.

and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan.

exit the menu. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. Cnst. and click OK. click Training Files. click in the drawing area. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. right-click 2nd Flr. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Cnst. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans.

Notice the immediate change in the line weights. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 6 Click the Model Categories tab.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 8 Click OK. expand the Stairs category. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. sections. this represents the view getting smaller. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 11 In the Save As directory. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and Up Arrow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. No annotations display in the view. and clear DOWN Text. 7 Under Visibility. navigate to the folder of your choice. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and click Save. Down Arrow. and other annotations in this view. UP Text. elevations. dimensions.rvt. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Annotation Categories tab.

double-click it in the Project Browser. and click Advanced Model Graphics. for Date and Time. click (Shadows Off). At that place. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Click OK. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. NOTE For this step. MA. Cnst. click the Place tab. specify 35. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. 2 On the View Control Bar. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select By Date. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. you can create. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. If you select a different city. modify. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. For Sun Position. specify 10/27. 1:00 PM. however. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 7 For Place. click OK. select Boston. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 9 For City. on the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. The higher the number.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you can select any city. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click OK. 6 Under Settings. 3 On the View Control Bar. Time and Place.rvt. and select 1st Flr. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . ■ For Contrast. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. Within a project. the darker the shadows.

you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. under Settings. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics. for Sun Position.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click OK. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. clear Ground Plane at Level.

click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. and notice the view title. TIP If the View tab is not available. right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the cursor. 6 On the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Sheet. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click to place it. and click View. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.

for Show Title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 12 In the Name dialog. under Graphics. click Edit/New. enter Presentation. and click Activate View. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. and click OK. To accomplish this.

This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. fill properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. If necessary. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Region Properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click . 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 22 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. When you finish drawing the chain. and the boundary of the region. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click Filled Region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click Edit/New. select Invisible lines. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click . 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines.

under Name. click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. under Identity Data. click Duplicate. for Fill Pattern. for Sheet Name. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click View Properties. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. scroll down. enter Solid Black. enter Presentation. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. right-click South.

expand the Doors category. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. By changing the angle of the sun. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. specify 2:30 PM. click Override. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. exit the menu. under Pattern Overrides. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click OK. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. scroll up. enter Presentation South Elevation. 13 For Contrast. under Elevations. and click OK. click in the drawing area. under Visibility. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Time and Place. and click Rename. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click in the Walls row. specify 35. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Visible. 12 Under Shadow. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 14 For Sun Position. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click (Shadows Off). right-click Copy of South. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. select By Date. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar.2 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 16 In the Name dialog. click . 9 Click OK. click Duplicate. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK. on the Model Categories tab. and click OK. under Settings. 18 For Time.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 .rvt.Presentation. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

select 1: 100. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and use the flip arrows if necessary.rvt. 4 Add the section shown below. click Section. Cnst.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).

select 1 : 100. expand Sections (Callout 1). Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. To accomplish this. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. this view needs to be rotated 180°.Section 2 is added to the building model. click Callout.

and click OK. enter Presentation Section 2. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. under Pattern Overrides. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 10 In the Project Browser. 17 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. clear Visible. scroll up. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand the Doors category. 15 Under Visibility. and click Rename.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Override. right-click Callout of Section 2. click in the Walls row. click the Model Categories tab. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 20 Click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 22 On the View Control Bar. click The crop regions no longer display.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. When you select the crop region. (Hide Crop Region).

4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the steps that follow. For Contrast. click . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. specify 35. specify the following: Under Shadow. click Duplicate. Click Apply. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The shadows do not offer much contrast. 2 On the View Control Bar. In addition. ■ For Sun Position. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). in the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Select Relative to View. select Directly. was added to this training file for training purposes. and click OK. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. For Azimuth. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Altitude. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. NOTE The line style. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click OK. specify 70°. click (Shadows On). You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. specify 135°. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings.

3 In the Views dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sheets (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Add View. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. and click to place the selected view. double-click A105 .Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.rvt. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Using a clock as a reference. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. double-click Section 2. and press Enter. To rotate an object. 9 On the Edit toolbar.5 In the Type Selector. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. The view title no longer displays. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. select Viewport : Presentation. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. click Modify. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . under Sections (Callout 1). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 6 On the Design Bar. click (Rotate). In the steps that follow.

double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.The callout rotates 180°. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.Presentation. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Modify. After applying the view template to a new section view.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click Rename. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1).rvt. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Presentation Section 2.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation. click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

14 In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . select Viewport : Presentation. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . select 90° Counterclockwise. and elevation swings no longer display. and click Deactivate View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog. The furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. annotations. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. lighting fixtures. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 Right-click the viewport.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. for Rotation on Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click OK. under Graphics.Presentation. under Names. select Presentation. and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. traditional analytiques contain a detail. In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . such as a tracery window or a column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484.

double-click Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select the callout.rvt. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Project Browser. click Callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. click Modify. as shown. After you add the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename.

double-click Presentation Callout. as shown. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. and click View Properties. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. clear Annotation Crop. 6 In the Project Browser. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.5 In the Rename View dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). 7 Select the crop region.

For Scale Value 1. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Design Bar. click Add View. double-click A105 . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Custom. specify 22. Click OK. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. under Sheets (all). do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Viewport : Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown below. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. double-click Presentation Callout. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click Deactivate View. In the steps that follow. When finished. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and make adjustments as necessary. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. 23 On the Design Bar. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). activate the viewport. click Region Properties.

You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the Type Properties dialog.Presentation. double-click A105 . click Finish Sketch. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. under Sheets (all). 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . and click OK 3 times. on the Design Bar. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. and click Activate View. When you are finished. click Filled Region. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. click . for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill.

click (Show Crop Region). The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the crop region. 32 On the Design Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 33 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. click .

38 Proceed with the next lesson. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View.35 On the View Control Bar.

You then add each view to the presentation sheet.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and apply shadows to the views. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1 : 200. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). 5 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click the Scale control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

in the list. select Directly. under Extents.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. and click Rename. For Azimuth. under 3D Views. For Altitude. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . under 3D Views. 12 In the Rename View dialog. Select Relative to View. Cnst. 8 In the Name dialog. specify 35. and click OK. for Silhouette style. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges. enter Isometric 1. Select 1st Flr. specify 45°. under 3D Views. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 1. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. specify 135°. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. A section box displays around the building model. For Sun Position. Click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click . Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Contrast. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Section Box. under 3D Views.

as shown. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.19 Select the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you are finished.

31 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. 25 To hide the section box. and click OK. In the Type Selector. and click OK. When you are finished. double-click Isometric 2. On the Annotation Categories tab. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 27 Select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. the stairs and railings may display. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes. right-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. you can adjust the plane location.Presentation.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. 21 In the Project Browser. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 3. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 24 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 29 To hide the section box. Next. If desired. under 3D Views. and click OK. make a copy of the view. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. double-click A105 . under 3D Views. click Modify on the Design Bar. enter Isometric 3. right-click Copy of Isometric 2.

In the Type Selector.32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. The filled region partially covers the view. 33 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.

select Concrete. and click Activate View. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Region Properties. 35 Select the poche filled region. for Fill Patterns. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 39 For Background. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 36 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. click Edit. 40 Click OK twice. select Transparent. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Using the drawing tools. click Lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. This will make it easier to draw lines. On the Options Bar. 41 On the Design Bar.

50 Proceed with the next exercise. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Solid fill. 46 Click OK twice. and click Deactivate View. 47 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Fill Pattern. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.43 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. click Camera. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. under Floor Plans. a cutaway perspective view. you add it to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range. Cnst. you create the final view for the analytique. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . The view opens immediately.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise.

select Cast Shadows. For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click . select Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). for Name. For Contrast. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. under Extents. and click OK. A section box now cuts through the building model. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 12 Select the section box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Grips display on each plane of the section box.

select Scale (locked proportions). 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 On the Options Bar. clear Section Boxes. under Change. 21 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 18 On the View Control Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. double-click A105 . under 3D Views. click Size. under Sheets (all). Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. you must specify the actual size of the image. In the Type Selector. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 19 To hide the section box. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. for Width.14 Select the crop region. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. enter 165 mm. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown.

11 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Edit/New.rvt. select a font. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click . Annotating the Analytique | 503 . specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . select Text : Title. under Text.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. enter Description. and click OK. click Duplicate. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. enter Title. click Text. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click Edit/New. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. specify a text size of 6 mm. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Text. 3 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select the same font as the title.

16 In the Type Selector. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. and roofs. In this tutorial. curtain walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form. After you import the SketchUp model. you can easily add detail with Revit components. 507 . such as walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. that compose the building.

click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. select Auto-Detect. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. for File name. enter Import SketchUp. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Double-click the Common folder.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. click OK. click Training Files. enter SketchUp Model. and not in the library. For Colors. and click Save. 4 In the New Project dialog. visible elements.skp. Click the Sketchup file. 10 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog. select All. buildings. click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Template file. click Browse. and click Massing on the context menu that displays.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Files of type. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. For Layers. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. or select from a list. select SketchUp Files. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. you create a Revit Architecture project. select Preserve. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. click the Massing tab. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Import units.

Center. Click Open. select Manual . curtain walls. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. such as walls. and roofs. ■ ■ For Positioning. click Finish Mass. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. 17 In the warning dialog. select Level 1. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. depending on the complexity of the project. In a new project. click the Close button. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. For Place at level. 14 On the View toolbar. Level 1 is the only choice. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 .

select the face so that it highlights in red. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. curtain walls. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. that compose the building.18 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. and on the View Control Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. such as walls. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. and roofs. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. verify Basic Roof: Generic .400mm displays. After you create the building from the mass faces. verify Level 2 is selected. click Roof by Face. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. click to display masses. on the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 9 On the Options Bar. on the View toolbar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. verify that Select Multiple is selected. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. To see the new roof. click Create Roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 .

click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.

click Wall by Face. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click roofs that you created.15 On the Design Bar. select Core Face: Exterior. for Loc Line. verify Basic Wall: Generic . to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 16 On the View toolbar. 22 In the Type Selector. 21 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. 23 On the Options Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. click to view only the walls and roofs. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 28 In the Type Selector. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 25 On the View toolbar.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 31 Using the same technique. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create System.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Wall by Face. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and select it. click Roof by Face. 38 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. select the other wall. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. click Create System. click Curtain System. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

Below the right corner of the view. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. click Camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. and select the mass face shown below.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . under Floor Plans. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view the building that you have created.

roofs. as shown. The perspective view created by the camera displays. specify a point for the camera target. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click your building in the view. to view only the walls. 48 On the View toolbar. Click the frame to display its grips. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created.

click . click Modify. Under Grid 2 Pattern. select Center. Click OK. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Under Grid 1 Pattern. and select the left curtain system in the view.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. select Center. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . for Justification.

54 Select each roof to display its grips. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 On the View toolbar. 55 Right-click. 56 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. and click Cancel to end the command. double-click {3D}. and move the roof edges as shown below. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 63 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Door. double-click 3D View 1.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Like walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to select a panel. For example. you select the grid. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and mullions. to resize the system. To change grids. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Like windows. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model.rvt. and you can change these elements individually. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you create a curtain system using the wall command. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. and they are not windows. Unlike windows. grid lines. you need to change the length of the wall. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. panel. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. 525 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This affects the entire curtain system. or you can use a specific curtain system command. To switch panel types. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Wall.1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. Creating an Entrance | 527 .7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 In the Project Browser.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. top constraint.11 Select the curtain system. top and base attachments. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Click OK. using curtain grids. For Top Offset. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. enter 1200. and click (Properties). 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint.

double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 18 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. and click Rename.a. click Modify. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. under Floor Plans. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 20 In the drawing area. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. right-click Elevation 1 . 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation.

The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. Click to create a vertical grid. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 33 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select SECOND FLOOR. click Modify.26 While pressing CTRL. THIRD FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. SIXTH FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. and click OK. FOURTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. Click to place another grid line. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. FIFTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. one larger than the other.

Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.Next. The two segments are removed. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it. Creating an Entrance | 531 . you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.

532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and lock them. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. select One Segment. 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. click Curtain Grid.38 Using the same method.

TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. click in any white space to exit the editor. 43 Delete the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Use the following image as a guide. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Creating an Entrance | 533 . 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.

52 On the Type Selector. 54 On the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. on the new curtain system you added. These panels schedule as doors. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. . and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.Next. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click Modify. The panel changes to a double door. 57 On the View Control Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. not as curtain panels. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Training Files. They are part of the curtain panel category. This changes the graphics style of the Next.rfa. Now. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 55 In the Project Browser. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click view. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click Entrance Elevation. under Elevations.

Creating an Entrance | 535 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 63 Click OK twice. 65 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click System Panel : Solid.60 On the Type Selector. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 61 With the panel still selected. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panels display in blue. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe.

rvt. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.68 On the File menu. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click Save As. select Grid Line Segment. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.

Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. there are a few that you do not want. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. clickModify. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. however. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.6 On the Options Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. You are going to change some mullion joins. 10 Delete the mullions below them. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 .

you can also right-click. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Two mullion join controls display. 17 Save the file. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 15 On the Design Bar. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 14 Click the top mullion control. double-click Southeast Isometric. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 16 In the Project Browser. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. click Modify. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Finally.

select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. (Arc passing through three points). You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. under Floor Plans. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. for Top Constraint. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . For Top Offset. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Finally.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Click OK. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. enter 1200. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR.

10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. double-click East. Next. under Elevations. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. click Curtain Grid. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. eighths. You are going to use one of these snaps points. you place grids on the system. and then sixteenths.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select Basic Wall: Generic . Next. 16 On the Design Bar. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. 18 In the Type Selector.300mm. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you change some panels in the system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. click Modify. select the bottom layer of panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.

9 Select the extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. and click . clear Chain. for Depth. enter 100. click .Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 12 On the Options Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.rft. . and click OK. click Training Files. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Glass. under Elevations.

and click Change Walls Orientation.Pattern. and return to the project file. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.14 On the Design Bar. click 25 On the View toolbar.Pattern. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. click (Default 3D View).Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.rfa family. (SteeringWheels). select Curtain Panel . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . All fourth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans.rfa. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 23 Right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 24 On the View toolbar. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

28 Highlight a panel in the arc. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 27 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. select System Panel . 29 In the Type Selector. All the panels change to the solid panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . right-click. under Floor Plans. All fifth floor panels are selected.Solid. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 30 Save the file.

6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Click again to specify the ending point. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. under Elevations. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click ■ ■ For Sides. double-click East. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . select Mullion. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for Profile Usage. click Lines. Select Radius. except at the GROUND FLOOR level.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select it. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.rft. enter 8. 1 In the Project Browser. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. For vertical mullions. .

and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . click Modify. 28 On the View toolbar. click Mullion. click Modify. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click Visibility. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa family. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 On the Design Bar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Detail Component.11 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Training Files. clear Fine. 19 On the Design Bar. 31 Click . 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. double-click Southeast Isometric.detail. After the new profile is loaded. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. and click OK.rfa.rfa. and return to the project file. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under 3D Views. 20 Select the detail component. click Visibility. clear Coarse and Medium. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 27 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it can be added as a mullion type. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.

under Floor Plans. right-click. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 40 On the Design Bar. 43 Press DELETE. so you remove the unwanted ones. 38 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. 36 Under Construction. click Duplicate. click Modify. select Circular Mullion for Family. 44 Save the file. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. for Profile. 41 In the Project Browser. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. and click OK. 33 Click Edit/New. 37 Click OK twice. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You have placed more mullions than you want.32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 34 In the Type Properties dialog.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 1 In the Project Browser. TIP To chain select all the walls. All the inside faces highlight. a storefront system. under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 5 On the Options Bar. In this lesson. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you learned to create a curved curtain system. click Pick Walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. and you can click to select them all. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. make custom curtain panels and mullions. select Defines slope. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and a ruled curtain system. and press TAB.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 9 On the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 In the Project Browser. click Mullion. Click OK. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 600. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Modify. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file. under 3D Views. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 17 On the View Control Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.Storefront System In this exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. and enter 2400. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar.

even if the wall height changes. Storefront System | 551 . 12 Select the storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. To see how the grid layout is defined. click Modify. For this wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. click Edit/New. which is specified in the type. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 Click the temporary dimension. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. enter 10200 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. and click . the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. under 3D Views. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. see the Revit Architecture help. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you find Number. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 19 Select a curtain grid. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. select All Empty Segments. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 20 Save the file. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 16 Click OK. click Mullion.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and Offset. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. By setting the Angle value. double-click Southeast Isometric. or end. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. under 3D Views. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 1 In the Project Browser. Angle. Justification. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. enter 15. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. center. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

and highlight the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.3 On the View Control Bar. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.

you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 10 Select the panel. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 9 On the Design Bar. and click . but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. Next. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. click Curtain Grid. 11 Click OK. click Modify.8 Select the highlighted line. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

quarters. right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 16 In the Type Selector. and then eighths. and define a ruled curtain system. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . quarters. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 18 Save the file. Finally. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. select System Panel : Solid.

556 .

In this tutorial. Before you can sketch the roof profile. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. In this exercise. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In this lesson. 557 . including hip. and open Metric\m_Roofs. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. mansard. gutters.rvt. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to add fascia. You do not need to create the work plane. gable. shed. and low sloped roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.Roofs 15 In this lesson. In addition.

and click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. centerline.1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views (all). Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and so on). 4 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. select Name. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click the blue square on the witness line.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile.Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 16 On the View toolbar.

19 On the Tools toolbar. and select the second wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. The roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and double-click Section 1. 21 In the Project Browser.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Next. expand Sections (Type 1). and then select the exterior face of the wall. press CTRL. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click Modify. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Views (all). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. press TAB.

(Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. click Attach for Top/Base. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 On the Options Bar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.

and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.rvt. and click Yes. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 .You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. expand Floor Plans. Next. expand Views (all). 3 In the Project Browser. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and double-click Garage Roof. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.

click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 When you see the informational dialog. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 15 On the View toolbar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default. click Finish Roof.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. Next. under Dimensions. select both slope definition lines. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. and click OK. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click the model. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click (Properties). 11 Press CTRL. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. clear Defines slope. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. When you complete the roof. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. m_Roofs. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and double-click Level 3.

17 When you see the informational dialog. click (Rectangle). 15 On the Options bar.6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Next. 10 On the View menu.

rvt. select Defines slope. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Pick Walls.18 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. and double-click Level 2. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs.

9 On the Tools toolbar. and click (Pick Lines). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click (Trim/Extend). Next. using the following illustration for guidance. Next. 11 To trim the first line segment. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. select the left vertical slope definition line. close the roof sketch. clear Defines Slope. 10 On the Options Bar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.

click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and click OK. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Next. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click Modify. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click (SteeringWheels). click Finish Roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Roof Properties.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.

and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Next. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof.

select the left vertical roof line. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). click (Trim/Extend). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.rvt. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 10 To trim the first line segment. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. enter 0 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. m_Roofs. press TAB. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 300 for Overhang. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. clear Defines Slope.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. expand 3D Views. 19 On the View toolbar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click 20 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. you add a slope-defining line. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). and double-click 3D. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof Properties. Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all).11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints. select Defines slope. m_Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and press ENTER.

click Slope Arrow. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Before you can add slope arrows. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). To help locate the position of each split.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. add two new slope arrows. click (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. 4 In the Project Browser. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 5 On the View menu. and enter 600 for Offset. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 9 On the Tools menu. and double-click Level 2. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. you need to add two reference planes. Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. expand Floor Plans.

Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 16 Repeat steps 13 . and then click OK. click Edit.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. When you sketch a hip roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. expand Floor Plans. 20 Under Dimensions. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. select Slope for Specify. expand Views (all). 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. m_Roofs. (Properties). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 18 Press CTRL. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. the adjacent eave heights must align. 1 In the Project Browser. and click 19 Under Constraints. and move the cursor to place the arrow. click Modify. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 3 On the Options Bar. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. select both slope arrows. When eave heights differ.rvt.15 to add the second slope arrow.

click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. Next. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Align Eaves. (Properties). select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. under Dimensions. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Finish Roof. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. on the File menu.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 5 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. The eave lines display with a dimension. When aligning eaves. select a method to align the eaves. select Defines Slope. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 With the two gable end lines selected.

and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 3 Select the roof and. click Modify. on the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. expand Views (all).rvt. click Training Files. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. (Properties). expand Elevations. and double-click North. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.

click Lines. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. and click OK. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. Next. click (Pick Lines). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 14 On the Options Bar. click . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 10 On the Options Bar. press TAB. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and then select Defines slope.

Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. After you add the roof.17 On the View toolbar.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add a roof to a building shell. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Save As. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click mansard roof. click Training Files. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.

4 On the Options Bar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Pick Walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 5 In the drawing area. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. double-click Roof. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.

580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Tools toolbar.Because the walls are not continuous. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. click Finish Roof. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Insulation on Metal Deck . click (Trim/Extend). select Steel Truss . 11 On the Design Bar. for Type. and click OK. click Roof Properties.EPDM.

but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click to select it. In the next steps. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . The roof has been created. click (Draw Split Lines). You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. under Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. 16 On the Options Bar. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click Roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser.

20 Using the same method. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. move the cursor horizontally to the left.

In this exercise. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Next. exact placement of the points is not important.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You modify the points individually. 23 On the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. (Add points).

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter -2''. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for the dimension. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 25 Using the same method.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. and press ENTER.

and press ENTER. and on the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. click (Properties). enter 4''. 31 Select the roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click Modify. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. for Elevation. and select all of the roof edges. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.27 Press and hold CTRL.

click Save As. Creating Fascia. Gutters. select Variable. under Construction. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. After you create a roof. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. you can easily create its fascia. and Soffits on page 586. click Edit/New. for Structure. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. By making the insulation layer variable. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 36 View the results in the section view. and soffits. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. on the File menu. In some cases this type of slope is desired. Gutters. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to create roof fascia. gutters. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. gutters. click Edit. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and Soffits In this lesson. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 35 Click OK 3 times. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 37 If you want to save your changes. The entire slab is sloped.

under Construction. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. and click OK twice. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and click Open. click Duplicate. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 5 On the Options Bar.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 .rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click (Properties). click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 Press CTRL. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. enter Built-up Fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. 8 In the Name dialog. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Training Files.

13 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Gutters In this exercise. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Gutters on page 588. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 2 On the Options Bar. click (Properties).

click Edit/New. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK three times. Creating Gutters | 589 . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Soffits on page 590. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK. click Duplicate. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 10 Click to place the gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. under Construction. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs.rvt. you learn how to place a roof soffit. c_Condominium. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Views.Creating Soffits In this exercise.

click Join Geometry. 5 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views.4 Select the roof. and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. Creating Soffits | 591 . 6 In the Project Browser.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. select Millimeters. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. select mm. 2 In the Project Units dialog. In the final exercise. select Square meters. 593 .Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Unit Suffix. under Length. Click OK. click Training Files. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. and open Common\c_Area. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Project Units. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Finally. 3 Under Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. your values will be different. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. If you are using metric units. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.

There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. 9 Click Cancel. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. select m2. For Unit Suffix. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. or 0. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. expand Views (all). Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. the system-computed height defaults to the level. it is not necessary in this exercise. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. and click Room and Area. select 2 decimal places. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Click OK. click Settings. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. expand Floor Plans. click the Area Schemes tab. These schemes define spatial relationships. click the Room Calculations tab. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. click OK. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. right-click in the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ For Rounding.

12 When the informational dialog displays. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you must select one of the reference lines. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. you must manually add these boundary lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . Click OK. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 13 In the Project Browser. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. To modify the area. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. under Views (all). rather than the area tag.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you select No. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. click Area Plan. forming a closed loop. When you select Yes in this dialog.

19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. click Area Plan. Next. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. you create a new area plan for rentable space. When you add area boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. When you pick the walls. Click OK. common areas. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). If you do not select this option. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. and store area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. you can either draw them or pick them. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Boundary. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected.

click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click ■ ■ . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .23 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. and click to select the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.

click Area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ .■ Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 32 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Modify and select the area. Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.■ Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. enter Core for Name. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.

NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In this exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.Notice that within the two store areas. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.rvt. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. click Color Scheme Legend. In the next exercise. and click Save. name the project Area-in progress. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 37 On the File menu. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Save. and click to place the legend.

3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. under Category. click the Fields tab. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Areas (Rentable). 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 7 Under Available fields. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

Using Massing Tools In this lesson. or both. volume. curtain systems. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and floors. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. In this tutorial. You assign the default wall. 603 . At any time. roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. and perimeter information. and roofs. you then need to update the building face. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. After creating mass floors. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. floor. After you make building elements. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. If you modify a massing face. floors.

double-click Level 1. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all).rvt. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. click Training Files. and click Massing. under Floor Plans. and cutting geometry. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Create Mass. sweeps.

double-click Level 1. for Offset. select Mass (Opaque). 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Lines. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. enter 25000. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . and on the Options Bar. and click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Extrusion End. click the value for Material. (Pick Lines). 13 On the View toolbar. enter 1550 mm. and click OK. click 18 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and click OK. under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. (Line). click (Default 3D View).6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. for Name. click Extrusion Properties. under Views (all). 15 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans.

23 In the Materials dialog. under Views (all). 25 On the Design Bar. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 30 In the drawing area. under Constraints. for Extrusion End. and click OK. select Pick a plane. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 28 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion Start. under Materials and Finishes. double-click {3D} to see the results. for Name. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Project Browser.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent). highlight the larger form. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. enter 27500. TIP If necessary. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 25000. double-click West. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. and click OK. The second form is on top of the first form.

and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click (Draw). Next. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). click (Arc passing through three points). 37 On the Options Bar. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and clear Chain.31 Click to select the face. and click to select the line start point.

42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.TIP If you do not see this option. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click Edit Top. and delete the vertical construction line. click Lines and. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Elevations (Building Elevation). click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. under Views (all). click (Move). (Line). click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Modify. on the Options Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. double-click East.

for Material. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click Finish Sketch. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 50 On the Design Bar. (Arc passing through three points). click Blend Properties. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. In the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.48 On the Options Bar. 53 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 52 On the Design Bar.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Lines. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 7 Using the same technique. 1 In the Project Browser. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click (Line). and select Chain. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 4 On the Options bar. click Ref Plane. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. m_Massing_Start. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 10 On the Options Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. under Views (all). 2 In the drawing area. as shown. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. double-click Level 1. select the mass.

17 On the View toolbar. 15 Click OK.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. on the View Control Bar. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. snap the corners to the intersections. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 14 Under Constraints. for Extrusion End. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. In this exercise. Using Swept Blends | 611 . click Extrusion Properties. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. When sketching each extrusion. click Finish Sketch. enter 0. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Lines. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. m_Massing_Start. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select a point below the mass elements. click Sketch 2D Path.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. ■ For the radius.

click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. verify that <By Sketch> is selected.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. The only way to align these elements is visually. 11 On the Options Bar. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . click (Default 3D View). and click Edit. click Finish Path. click (Rectangle). 9 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 8 On the Design Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click Profile 1. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle.

Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and press ESC.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Finish Profile. click (Align). 17 Using the same method. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing .13 On the Tools toolbar. click Profile 2. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.

Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). 20 In the Element Properties dialog.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Profile. under Materials and Finishes. click <By Category>. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 22 Click OK twice. and click . 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. click Finish Swept Blend.

You place several instances of the mass families into the project. In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you create new family types from a mass family file.24 On the Design Bar. Finally. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click Finish Mass.rvt.

enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. In this exercise. 7 Click New. and click OK. for Depth. enter 11000 mm. for Depth.rfa. and click Apply. click Training Files. enter 46000mm. 3 In the Name dialog. and click Apply. enter 68000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Width. enter 12000 mm. for Depth. and click Apply. 8 For Width. enter 9000 mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 18000 mm. and click OK. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. and for Name. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 18000 mm. click New. enter 6000 mm. under Other. click Family Types. 5 Click New. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Click OK. for Height. and for Name. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . 2 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. for Height. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. for Height. 6 For Width. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000mm.

(Show Mass) to show the massing model.rfa. under Views (all).rfa. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 If not already selected. double-click Site. on the View toolbar. as shown. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. Semi Barrel Vault.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Place Mass. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 3 On the View Control Bar.rfa family files. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. and Triangle. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. Arc Dome. 6 Open the Box-Training.

Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . click Modify. 20 In the Type Selector. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. select Rotate after placement. and click (Element Properties). 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. specify Mass (Transparent). enter 90 for Angle. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click Place Mass. 23 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select the box. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. select the triangle. click (Element Properties). 24 On the Design Bar. as shown. and on the Options Bar. 17 Press CTRL. 25 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. 21 On the Options Bar. and click to place the mass. click Place Mass. click Modify.10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. select the 3 boxes. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500.

30 Place the box mass family as shown. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). specify Mass (Opaque). 33 On the View toolbar. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK twice. 29 In the Type Selector. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click (Element Properties). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.

click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. In the next exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you join these mass elements. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.rvt file. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. (Join Geometry).

622 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans. click (Mirror). under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. on the Edit toolbar.

17 Press ESC to see the result. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. for Axis. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.8 On the Options Bar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. (Join Geometry). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. enter SM. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. click (Draw). and then select the triangle. click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . as shown. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.

You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. (If Design Options is already selected. click Modify. you joined mass elements together. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.rvt. and select the triangle mass element. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click (Add to Design Option Set). click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. do not clear the check mark. 1 On the Design Bar. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.

15 In the Element Properties dialog.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. click Modify. 5 In the Project Browser. for Angle. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the drawing area. double-click Site. under Views (all). 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click OK twice. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. specify Mass (Transparent). select the 2 semi barrel vaults. select Sloped (primary). click Place Mass. click Place Mass. for the Material parameter. clear Curved. and click OK. select Rotate after placement. 13 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). enter 90.

26 On the Design Options toolbar. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Add to Design Option Set). 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. While pressing CTRL. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and click (Element Properties). It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 22 In the Project Browser. for the Material parameter. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. under 3D Views. and click OK twice. TIP To find the correct shapes. 20 In the drawing area. select Curved. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 23 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. under Views (all). under Views (all). click Modify. under Elevations. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and watch the status bar. select the three arc domes. clear Sloped. specify Mass (Transparent). double-click {3D}. and click OK.

31 Click the value for Design Option.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Option. In this exercise. you placed mass elements into Design Options. you can make it the primary option. select Curved and. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click (Design Options). 35 On the File menu. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click the Design Options tab. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Make Primary. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . and click OK. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 34 Close the warning that displays. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. and click Close.rvt. select Curved from the Design Option menu.

1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View toolbar. and for Loc Line. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Wall Centerline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 6 On the Options Bar. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. under Views (all).Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create walls. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click {3D}. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components.Brick on CMU. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Wall by Face. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. click (Pick Faces). select Basic Wall: Exterior . TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.

under Views (all). double-click Level 3. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 16 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all).The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click Level 5. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. double-click Level 1.

If desired. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. double-click Level 9. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. click Wall by Face. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.

The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. click Mass Floors. and click OK. double-click {3D}. Curtain Systems. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 8 On the Design Bar. volume. When you select levels. select all levels. clear Curtain Panels. and exterior surface area. click Modify. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. under Views (all).rvt. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 4 Click OK.In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . perimeter.

select Levels 1-4. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 On the Options Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 10 Press CTRL. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Modify. and click OK. click Mass Floors.

and click OK. 15 Press CTRL. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. click Mass Floors. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Level 1.14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model.

Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Mass Floor. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. under Category. Floor Volume. and click OK. select Floor Area. and select Level.In this exercise. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects.rvt. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Using the same method. press and hold SHIFT. under Available fields. and click Add. Floor Perimeter. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. The Floor Area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. and click OK. for Sort by. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. for Usage. select Mass: Family and Type. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. enter Retail.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

under Scheduled fields (in order). click Move Up until Usage is listed first. After you assign usage. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Edit. select Mass: Family and Type. 14 Select Level. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. and click Remove. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. and click Properties. 13 With Usage selected. for Fields.

select Calculate totals. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and plan views. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Usage. for Filter. under Other. 19 Click OK twice. 27 Click OK twice. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). and select Grand totals. and click Rename. for Filter by. under Fields. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. and in the field below. select Usage. select Level. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. in the field under Filter by. for Sort by. elevation. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. 18 On the Filter tab. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. for Then by. click Edit. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. select Floor Area. click Edit. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Hotel. under Other. for Field formatting. and click Properties. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. 16 On the Formatting tab.

click Roof by Face. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. floor perimeter. you created mass floor schedules. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. double-click {3D}.rvt. the floor area. The mass floor schedules list.In this exercise. by level. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you pick massing faces to create roofs.

5 On the Options Bar. Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . click Create Roof. click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.400mm.4 In the Type Selector.

and click OK. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. In this exercise. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected.8 Using the method you just learned. in the Type Selector. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . and Walls. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Curtain Panels. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Using the same method. click Create Roof. Curtain Systems. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. select Sloped Glazing.

5 Press CTRL. 3 In the Type Selector. verify that Select Multiple is selected. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. click Curtain System by Face. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Create System. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

rvt. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Next. clear Curtain Panels. under Floor Plans. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. for Width. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.1 In the Project Browser. Curtain Systems. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Exclude Design Options. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and then click OK. and click (Element Properties). enter 30000. click Modify. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 2 On the View menu. Floors. under Views (all). 7 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. and Walls. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. Roofs.

13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. under Views (all). you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. In the next steps. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1.10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

14 On the Options Bar.TIP To select the curtain wall. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the View toolbar. 17 Select the roof as shown. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click OK. click Remake. you want to select the smaller one.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar.

under Schedules/Quantities. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family.rvt.20 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.

Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click All to select all categories. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. under 3D Views. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Massing only. 3 In the Project Browser. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 4 Rename the view 3D . right-click {3D}. 9 Select Mass.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection.

In this exercise. You might create the model shown. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell. This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired. such as columns and an extruded roof. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.

652 .

When you make changes to a nested group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. hotel rooms. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. By grouping objects. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. the host group is also updated automatically. all instances in the building model are updated. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. In this tutorial. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and typical office layouts. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. In another exercise. 653 . you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You can also nest groups within other groups. You mirror one instance of the group. and modify repetitive units. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you also simplify the modification process. place. you not only simplify their placement. For example. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Modifying. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. In this exercise. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. or with those working on a different project. After you create a model group. Creating. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units.

654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. click Training Files. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and double-click First Floor. enter ZR. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. 2 Click in the drawing area. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 .

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 7 On the Design Bar. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin.

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. under Groups. expand Model.

14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Copy. click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify. as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar. one mirrored. and one rotated. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. and click to select it. and click Save. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group In this exercise. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. press TAB to highlight the wall. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group | 661 . click Save As. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.

and click to select the wall. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. select the element. and click member to group instance. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. NOTE To display an excluded element. click Modify. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door.).).).

13 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Modifying a Group | 663 . 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Modify. 14 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.127mm. select Basic Wall : Generic . 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. click Wall. click Door.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm.

move the cursor up. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.17 On the Design Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. In edit group mode. click Modify. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Edit Group. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 In the drawing area.

click Modify. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.25 On the Design Bar. which acts as the host. created in an earlier lesson. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. enter 1000. and click OK. for Unconnected Height. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 26 Select the opening. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Nesting Groups | 665 . and the wall and folding doors for the closet. and on the Options Bar. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. enter 2134. under Constraints. click Finish. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. (Element Properties). click 28 For Base Offset.

3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the group editor toolbar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.rvt.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group. click (Add to Group). under Floor Plans. click Edit Group. in the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the drawing area. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

double-click Second Floor. select the wall between the folding doors. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 667 .6 Press TAB. 7 On the group editor toolbar. and each of the bifold doors. 8 In the Project Browser.

Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as text. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. In the next exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. and filled regions. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as door and window tags. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. under Floor Plans. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. double-click First Floor. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add door tags to a group.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region.

and click OK. as shown. and select the text note and the filled region. 12 Enter Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click to add an arc leader. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Text.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. click (Group). enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and on the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.

expand Detail. under Groups. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . and click Create Instance. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. 22 On the Design Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser.18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.

click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.manner that a drawing component can be added. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. as shown. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. clear Leader. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. click (Group). Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. for Attached Detail Group Name. 8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.7 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor.

Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 14 On the Options Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. click Place Detail. and click OK. therefore. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 16 On the Design Bar. When you load the group from the library into a new project. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Modify. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

rvt. expand Groups. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 12 On the Design Bar.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 3 For File name. 5 In the New Project dialog. and expand Model. and click OK. under Groups\Model. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. browse to the Desktop. and click Open. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). In this case. verify that Project is selected. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. accept the default template file. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save Group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used.rvt. click OK. A warning dialog displays. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Create Instance. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. click Modify. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Desktop. for Create new.

click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and the link is removed. click Modify. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Use Existing. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. expand Revit Links. and on the Options Bar. When a group is converted to a link. click Bind.rvt file is added as a link to the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Remove Link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the linked Revit model. and click OK. click Training Files. 18 In the Project Browser. 24 In the message dialog. click Link. verify that Attached Details is selected only.rvt.

islands. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Using Site Tools In this lesson. You add property lines manually. In the final exercises. convert the data to a table. 677 . you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways.Site 19 In this tutorial. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and then modify the data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.

enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. click Point. click Toposurface.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 3 On the Design Bar. This project file was created using the default metric template. click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_First_Project.rvt. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. In the second part of this exercise. and click Site. Using the first method. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Use the following illustration as a reference.

12 On the Settings menu. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 12000mm. under Additional Contours. under Increment. 15000mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. click Finish Surface. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. click Site Settings. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter 1500mm. Use the following illustration as a reference.8 On the Options Bar.

and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click the elevation value. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . on the Standard toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click to delete it. 19 On the Design Bar. Before importing the contour data.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. modify the level names and elevations. 16 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). click to view it at various angles. and press ENTER. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar. enter 1000mm. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. (SteeringWheels). 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click (Default 3D View).

clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 30 On the Edit menu. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and click OK. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify. and press ENTER. double-click Site. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Colors. click Training Files. 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. select Specify. Until it is exploded. select Preserve. rename the level Basement. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. click Pin Position. 29 Select the imported topography. under Floor Plans. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Click Open. For Layers. under Views (all).21 Click the Level 2 text. 23 Click the Level 1 text. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 24 In the Project Browser. click Yes. it is considered an import symbol. Verify that Current view only is not selected. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.

32 On the View menu.31 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. clear C_INDX. click Modify. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. and click OK. 34 Under Visibility. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. 36 On the Design Bar. when the edges highlight. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. and then click OK. When you select the import symbol. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. click Visibility/Graphics.

40 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). 42 On the View toolbar.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Surface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the second method. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click (Default 3D View). you add property lines using two methods. name the project Site-in progress. this project file is required in its current state. Using the first method. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 39 On the Design Bar. and click Save.rvt. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.

do so before continuing. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. On the Design Bar.rvt. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Site-in progress. under Floor Plans. Adding Property Lines | 685 . 4 On the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Property Line. Click Modify. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. and click OK. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration.

NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. add an arc line on the right. click OK. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. to delete them. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Property Line. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. and click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. select the lines. 6 On the Design Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar. when they highlight. click Finish Sketch. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . select Edit Table. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. on the Standard toolbar.

review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. This means there is no gap in the property lines. Adding Property Lines | 687 . click to place the property lines. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. If the gap is not closed. 15 Starting in Row #1.14 In the Property Lines dialog. 16 Click OK. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 19 In the Tags dialog.

30 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. In the next exercise. 25 Under Visibility.20 Click Load. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 23 On the View menu. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the Imported Categories tab. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click to place it. and click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. In this exercise. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click Tag ➤ By Category. In the final step. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. click Visibility/Graphics. Before adding property line segment tags. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. you created two sets of property lines. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Training Files. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689.dwg and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag.rfa. and click Drafting.

for Subcategory. select a shade of Brown. 2 On the Settings menu. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Under Line Pattern. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click Site Settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Line Color. 7 Click OK. Site-in progress. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Under Subcategory. select Topography. select Dash dot.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 10 Under Additional Contours. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. In the Object Styles dialog. under Contour Line Display. enter 1000. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Under Range Type. click Object Styles. select Single Value. enter the name Working Contour. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. select Working Contour. and click OK. click New. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.0mm.

it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. The next exercise requires a new training file. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. parking areas. In the next exercise.11 Click OK. such as material. In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. parking areas. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. Working Contour. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. The object style subcategory.

click Lines. and open Metric\m_Site. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide.rvt. click Training Files. try to replicate the location and proportion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 2 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.

692 | Chapter 19 Site . Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. 6 In the Materials dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.NOTE In the Metric training file. and click OK. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step.Tarmacadam for Name. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. click Properties. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 8 On the Design Bar.

9 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. they display within this schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 .Tarmacadam. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. and double-click Topography Schedule. As you create new subregions. click Edit Boundary. 12 On the View Control Bar.

Within each subregion. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the project area has increased. click Subregion. 16 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. In this training project. 17 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Delete overlapping lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 694 | Chapter 19 Site .TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 18 In the Project Browser.

23 In the upper-right parking area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Materials and Finishes. and click to open the Materials dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. and click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. 29 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch.Grass for Name. double-click Topography Schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 26 In the Materials dialog. select Site . 28 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data.Grass for Name. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. enter Island . use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.

32 In the Project Browser.Grass. 34 On the Design Bar. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.31 In the Project Browser.walkway. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Notice that the schedule has been updated. and apply the material Site . double-click Site. double-click Site. Name the subregion Walkway. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . click Subregion. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans. click Lines. Name each region Island Grass. 35 On the Design Bar.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. click Finish Sketch.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . double-click Topography Schedule.

this project file is required in its current state.rvt. under Floor Plans. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. and click Save. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 2 Select the toposurface. double-click Site.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. When you use the grading tool. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.

RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 8 Select the topographic surface. and click OK.3 On the Options Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. under Phasing. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . select Existing for Phase Created. see the tutorial. click Modify. click (Element Properties). stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Using Phasing on page 761. A warning dialog is displayed. click Graded Region. and click Select and Edit. select Copy Internal Points.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. demolished. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

702 | Chapter 19 Site . Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.13 Press DELETE. click Finish Surface. click Point. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 18 On the View toolbar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.

you can delete it. and click OK. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. only the original toposurface displays. and delete it. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. you create a building pad. this project file is required in its current state. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 24 On the View menu. specify New Construction for Phase. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. (SteeringWheels). Therefore. under Phasing. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . under Phasing. click to view it at various angles. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Only the graded topography displays. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.20 On the View toolbar. When you add a building pad. click View Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. specify Existing for Phase. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.

you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.rvt. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model. NOTE By default. 4 On the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. the Pick Walls command is active.

Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Notice the new building pad. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 9 On the View toolbar.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components on page 706. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. this project file is required in its current state. click (SteeringWheels).

rvt. double-click Site.Adding Site Components In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Type Selector. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.90 deg. under Floor Plans. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 706 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Parking Component. click Modify.

8 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Adding Site Components | 707 . click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. under Floor Plans. choose any tree type. double-click Site.9 On the View toolbar. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . Notice the new parking spaces. 12 In the Type Selector. click Site Component.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View).13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 15 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. In the following illustration. 14 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. Adding Site Components | 709 .

this project file is required in its current state. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. under Floor Plans. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 5 On the View menu. and click OK.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Apply. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Hidden Line. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points.rvt. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click Apply. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed.

In the following exercise. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. 8 On the Options Bar. to position the shoulder of the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click again to the left to position the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. outside of the site. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark.

■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Press and hold CTRL.

click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. this project file is required in its current state. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.■ Clear Leader. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 .

click Schedule/Quantities. If necessary.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Mark. double-click Site. 10 In the Project Browser. click Tile. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. select Parking for Category. select Type. and under Heading. 11 On the Window menu. The parking schedule is displayed. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Site plan. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. and click OK. 9 On the Window menu. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click Add.rvt. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. number the first three spaces consecutively. 5 Under Available fields. under Views (all). 714 | Chapter 19 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. and click Add. click the Fields tab. 7 Under Fields. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and under Heading. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. enter Size. 8 Under Fields. select Mark. under Space. click Close Hidden Windows. 4 Under Available fields. enter Space.

finish numbering the remaining spaces. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

716 .

and click Editable. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Using Worksharing. doors. After the project is shared. You can enable Worksharing for any project. stairs. such as annotations and dimensions. they cannot make changes to it. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. When you are working on a shared project. A workset is a collection of building elements. In this tutorial. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you can select which worksets are open or closed. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you must first enable Worksharing. called Worksharing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. however. floors. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Elements specific to a view. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. go to the Worksets dialog. use Element Borrowing. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Working in a shared project In a shared project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you specify an active workset. To make a workset editable. select the desired workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. and so on. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. All other team members can view this workset. such as walls.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects.

You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. not including the Project Standards. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Experience has shown that. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. When setting up Worksharing. In most projects. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. such as a tenant interior. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In the next exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. and View worksets. You should have at least one workset for each person. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other.dialog. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. for a typical project. After learning the fundamentals. In a multi-story structure. Shared Levels and Grids. Instead. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members.

the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be.Team member roles Typically. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. As new members create worksets for their own use. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. On this tab. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. When you create a new workset. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. with each assigned a specific functional task. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. if a workset named Interior was created. For example. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Regardless of the default setting. each team member has control over a portion of the design. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. designers work in teams. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team.

each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. However. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. however. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. your changes propagate to the entire team. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. within the local file. When you save to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you should then save to your local file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When finished or at regular intervals.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. After saving to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. the file is saved as the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. On the Options Bar. As you work. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. proceeds as usual. Generally. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Therefore. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. When you save locally (to your local file). you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. your changes are saved. This makes them available to other team members. This is called “Selective Open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you can select which workset is active. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you make that workset editable by you. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.

You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Alternatively. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. In this instance. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and then save the local file. using VPN. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. for instance. you work no differently then you would in the office. In this situation. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. To do this. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In the next exercise.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you should check out the Materials workset. In this conceptual exercise. make any required worksets editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. and make that workset editable. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. When working remotely. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. save to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you will not only lose the changes to that workset.

Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and notice all are editable by you. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. under Show. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. click Training Files. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. The Worksets dialog displays. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets.rvt. Your username displays as the present owner. and open Common\c_Worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. 3 In the Worksets dialog. When you enable worksharing. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing.

clear Families. 9 Click New. imagine four users including yourself. 13 In the Rename dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 8 Click OK. Therefore. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and Views. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. expand Views (all). Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. In this case. expand Floor Plans.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. it is better to make them visible by default. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. type the name Exterior Shell. ■ 5 Under Show. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. In this training file. however. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. under Identity Data. You do. 12 Click Rename. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Because the interior walls appear in many views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. and click OK. you can rename the default workset. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. another is assigned the interior layout. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click OK. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. click New. clear Visible by default in all views. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Project Standards. and double-click Level 1. click . Rather than create a new workset for these elements. a small number of team members are working on the building model. When you initially activate Worksharing. For training purposes. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. currently named Workset1. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". 17 On the Options Bar. In this simple training project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 16 In the drawing area. Only User-Created worksets should display. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. select Workset1. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. For example.

Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. under Identity Data. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 On the View menu. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. and click OK. 23 Select all of the interior elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 24 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .19 Click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select Interior Layout for Workset. 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Identity Data. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. click Visibility/Graphics. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click the Worksets tab. stairs. including the interior doors. and walls. and click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements.

Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If any interior elements remain. 32 Select Interior Layout. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click . Now that you have created the central file. In this exercise. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 41 In the Worksets dialog. under Floor Plans. click Close. 34 In the drawing area. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. and click OK. 35 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 On the File menu. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . under Views (all). 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. under Identity Data. 39 Click Save. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 38 In the Save As dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. make sure you remember the location of this central file. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 42 On the right side of the dialog. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. click Non Editable. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. double-click Level 2. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 43 Click OK. click Save As. select Interior Layout for Workset. 30 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Worksets.

Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and double-click Level 1. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. check out worksets. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and select Yes for Editable. In addition. You have created a local file which is for your use only.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and click Save. click Open. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. select the central file. please do so before continuing. Before working on the model. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. click Save As. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 2 In the Open dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select Interior Layout. expand Views (all). you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. make modifications to the building model. 4 Click Open. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select Interior Layout for Name. 12 Click OK. In this case. select all the User-Created worksets. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and select Specify. click Options. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 7 In the Save As dialog. 13 On the Window menu. you create your local file. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 6 On the File menu. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session.

Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . On the Options Bar. you can still edit this wall. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. under Identity Data. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. however. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the File menu. If this is selected. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. In the Worksets dialog. 20 Under Constraints. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click Worksets. In this case. If it was owned by another user. Because this element is not owned by another user. 22 Click OK. click Modify. notice the Editable Only option. click . the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 18 On the Options Bar.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. 24 Click OK. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Verify that it is cleared. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.

and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. click Modify. click Door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Basic Wall: Interior . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. The precise location is not important. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 31 On the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Wall. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.126mm Partition (2-hr). 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 26 Delete the door. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.

and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. In this particular case. click Save to Central. make elements editable. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. you should perform regular saves. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . You modified the building model. save to central. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. At the end of a work session. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Borrowed Elements is selected. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you created your local file. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and reload the latest changes. Throughout the process. two users access the central file through a network connection. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. checked out worksets. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. leave this file open in its current state. it is recommended. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. a tooltip. In addition. In this exercise. please do so before continuing. When working in your local file. By default. displays the workset as well as the element type. Whenever you save. add two door openings into the rooms you created. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. and save locally immediately afterward. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. If you have not yet completed these exercises. For training purposes. you should relinquish all worksets. each user must check out worksets.

12 In the Save As dialog. return to the Settings dialog. 15 On the File menu. select the central file. 9 Click Open. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. click Options. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. under Username. enter User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. You now have a local copy of the project. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Options. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select all the User-Created worksets. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. and click OK. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 4 Click the General Tab and. click Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This file is for your use only. instructions are staggered. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 7 In the Open dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Save As. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. For training purposes. specifically sequenced. User 2: Create a local file. 3 On the Settings menu.rvt. In the following section of this exercise. one user has already created a local file. This is a system setting. click Open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 11 On the File menu. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. consider that person to be User 1. skip the following section. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and select Specify. and click Save. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. and click OK. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise.

User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. If you only have one workset checked out. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. User 1: Check out worksets. 19 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Save to Central. expand Floor Plans. it becomes the active workset. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets.You are now the owner of that workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. modify the building model. and double-click Level 1. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). select the lower exterior wall. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. If it is not open. and double-click Level 1. 27 On the File menu. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.” 29 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 17 Click OK. open it now. 23 Click OK.

The changes User 2 made are apparent. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Click Yes. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset.” 35 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 44 In the Project Browser. User 1: Reload latest worksets. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select Yes for Editable. 43 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK. click Reload Latest. click Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. right-click Level 1. 33 On the File menu. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 37 On the File menu. click Worksets. 45 In the Rename View dialog. you should create a furniture plan view. under Views (all). However. and click Rename. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 41 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans.” 39 Click OK. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. When you save to central. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 46 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

48 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Project Standards. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 50 On the View menu.200mm. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Save to Central. NOTE System families. 49 On the Design Bar. 65 Click OK. and click OK. click Save to Central. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . click Reload Latest. rather than Families. click Edit/New. and click Element Properties. click Rename. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 60 In the Rename dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 66 On the File menu. click Component. choose any desk. such as Wall Types. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Modify. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click inside any room. click Worksets. under Show. enter Exterior Wall . the Visible by default option was not selected. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. are placed under Project Standards. click Visibility/Graphics. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 62 On the File menu.” 55 Click OK. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. 61 Click OK 2 times. Therefore. 53 On the File menu.

select Reload Latest. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise requires two users and. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . modified the building model. User 1: Reload latest. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. As each of you work. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. finished the previous workset exercises. and still have your local files open. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and published their changes back to the central file. leave this file open in its current state. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets.rvt. and save 69 On the File menu. 70 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. There are specific instructions for each user. Each user checked out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In subsequent steps. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. throughout this training. click Options. click Training Files. and these problems are rectified. leave this file open in its current state. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. you need to set up your central and local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. select the following. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Each user must have network access to the central file. and click OK. click Save As. select Save to Central. Checking out worksets. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you save the training file as a central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise.

and select Specify. 13 In the Open dialog. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. The central file should still be open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This is a system setting. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. select the central file. Next. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. click Save As. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Options. click Options. Set the Username to User 2. In addition. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. 8 In the Save As dialog. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 17 On the File menu. and click Save. 6 On the File menu. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 15 Click Open. On the Settings menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 5 Click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 12 On the File menu. and click OK. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Make this a Central File after save. click Options. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 .4 In the File Save Options dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Save As. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1.

26 In the Worksets dialog. You are now the owner of that workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. under Floor Plans. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and select Yes for Editable. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. Afterwards. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and click Editing Requests. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. click the File menu. double-click Level 1. and then click OK. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the Interior Layout workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 30 On the left exterior wall. select Interior Layout. select the second window from the top. You are now the owner of that workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select Exterior Shell. At this point. and click Open.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 24 Under Active Workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. 27 Under Active Workset. After you submit the request. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select them. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset.

select the following. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. you requested permission to edit the element. to Local.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and the other user granted it. select the request submitted by User 2. 35 Click Grant. click Close. and notice the window is in the new location. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select Save to Central. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . In this multi-user exercise. 36 Click Close. In this case. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 38 Click OK. click Check Now. and click OK.

738 .

you can have multiple sets of design options. Using design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). The client has asked you to create various options. In this tutorial. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In this particular case. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. For example.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. At any time in the design process. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. 739 . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. After you and the client agree on the final design.

and click Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. make your final design decision. under Option Set. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. therefore. you can edit it. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the final exercise of this lesson. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). each with multiple design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With the second option.In the first exercise in this lesson. you design each of the structural options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. each is constructed for interchangeability. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. click Training Files.rvt. In the second exercise. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. click Edit Selected. click New. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. After you create a design option. you set up multiple design option sets. TIP In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the only available command is to create a new option set. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the roof and structure systems must work together. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.

In this case. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. TIP To center the middle column. click Column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. expand Views (all). select: ■ ■ ■ . and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. add three columns. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 5 On the View menu. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 7 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.4 In the Project Browser. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). By selecting Multiple. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . expand Floor Plans. click 12 On the Options Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. In the following illustration. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. or add a dimension string between the columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and the third column centered between the two. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process.

they are difficult to see in this view. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 17 Zoom out and. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. Because of the size of the columns. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. click . 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 18 On the View toolbar.

20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom in on the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. select Round Bar : 50mm. double-click TOP OF CORE. click Modify. The first click specifies the beam start point. Next. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 21 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 24 Select the Beam you added previously. In it. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 19 In the Project Browser. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 23 On the Design Bar.

25 On the Edit toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and click the center point. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . 30 On the View toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar. zoom into the left column.

44 Select the option set Roofing and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 34 In the Design Options dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. 46 Under Option. enter Beam for New. 38 In the Rename dialog. under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). enter Roofing for New. click New. and click OK. 45 Under Roofing. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 36 In the Rename dialog. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. and click OK. and click OK. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. name the option Louvers. under Option Set. enter Structure for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click Rename. click Rename. click Rename. 41 Under Option Set. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. not a new option set. select Option 1 (primary). click New. under Option. click New. under Option Set.

notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. name the option Sunscreen. 53 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. it will resemble the following illustration. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 51 Under Edit. Under Now Editing. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 48 Under Option. you create the second design option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. double-click ROOF TERRACE. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 52 Click Close. When finished. click Rename. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. and click OK.47 Under Roofing. select Edit Selected. under Structure. select Beam. select Option 2.

The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 .55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Align. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. select M_Roof Beam. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component. Refer to the following illustration. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu.

65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. The first click sets the move start point. click Modify. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The second click represents the move end point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 62 Select the beam and.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. which is visible by default. and click Save. click Save As. you need this file in its current state.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 66 On the View toolbar. name the file. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 68 In the Design Options dialog. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.rvt. 69 Click Close. click Finish Editing. 70 On the File menu. Notice that even before you close the dialog. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click . 67 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.

place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. each with multiple design options to pick from. expand Floor Plans. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. In the next exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. select Louvers (primary). do so now. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 4 Under Edit. delete them after the rafter is in place. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. click Edit Selected. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Sunscreen. 2 On the Tools menu. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress.In this exercise. expand Views (all). a Louver system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you design each of the roofing options. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 8 In the Type Selector. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. With the second option. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. under Roofing. The first option. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Under Now Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 3 In the Design Options dialog. the other for beams. open it now. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you need to add dimensions. The second roofing system. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 5 Click Close. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. you set up multiple design option sets. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Component.

16 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Array.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. Enter 5 for Number. and click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 15 On the Edit menu. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. enter 11750 mm for Length. Select Constrain. under Other. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

enter 990. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

and click Array. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Component. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . under Other. Enter 34 for Number.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 25 With the louver still selected. enter 5475 mm for Length. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. and select the louver you just placed. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 For the array starting point. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. Select Constrain. click the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click OK. 20 In the Type Selector.

29 On the View toolbar. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. when the listening dimension displays. and press Enter. and. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click .28 Move the cursor vertically downward. enter 300.

select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. expand Elevations. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. select Sunscreen. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 37 In the Work Plane dialog. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 34 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Tools menu. 39 On the Design Bar. click Edit Selected. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the Design Options dialog.The louver roof system is complete. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. under Edit. 33 Under Editing. click Finish Editing. Therefore. and then click Close. and double-click West. 40 On the Options Bar. Click OK. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. under Roofing. In this case. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and click OK. click Lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. click . The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.

This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. click Trim/Extend. click Finish Sketch. click . 43 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. then you can modify it through the dimension. You will fix this in a later step. The first two points define the ends of the line. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. Under Constraints. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Properties. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 48 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Select the right arc. 46 On the Tools menu. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 49 On the View toolbar. The arcs should connect. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. and the third point defines the arc. then the center arc. 45 Click OK. 41 Select the top of the left column. the top of the next column on the right. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End.

4 In the Project Browser. you select a design. secondary. Sunscreen. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options.The louver roof system is complete. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. under Views (all). right-click {3D}. and delete the discarded design options. tertiary. click Finish Editing. The second roofing system. do so now. 52 On the File menu. and click OK. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. The first option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and then click Close. click Save. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and click Rename. under Views (all). click Design Options ➤ Design Options. expand 3D Views. enter Primary Option. make it part of the building model. you need this file in its current state. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you designed each of the roofing options. and click Duplicate. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. 50 On the Tools menu. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. After exploring the combinations. a Louver system. under Edit. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and last options. Managing Design Options | 757 . was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Managing Design Options In this exercise. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers.

click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. 11 On the View menu.5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Primary Option. 7 On the View menu. and click Rename. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.

double-click Last Option. Managing Design Options | 759 . In your design options. under Views (all). At this point. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Tertiary Option. In this case. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. under Views (all). 19 On the View menu. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.

The set is deleted. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 26 Under Option Set. and deleted the discarded design options. double-click Primary Option. select Beam. This was the client choice for structural. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog.22 On the Tools menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Yes. An alert is displayed. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Save. click Close. Because the client has selected the design option. In this exercise. 23 In the Design Options dialog. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 31 In the alert dialog. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . After exploring the combinations. 30 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary. made it part of the building model. 27 In the alert dialog. select Make Primary. the current primaries are no longer options. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you selected a design. under Structure. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Yes. 29 Select Roofing. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. since you no longer need them. 35 On the File menu. click Delete. 24 Under Option. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 25 Select Structure. click Delete to remove the views that used options.

complete with schedules. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. 761 . For the client. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. demolish existing walls and doors.Project Phasing 22 In any project. demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. You create new phases. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project.

This means that all building model elements. expand Views (all). click (Element Properties). 5 Select any of the exterior walls. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. and open Common\c_Phasing. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. regardless of phase. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. As you add new elements to the building model. and click OK. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. In the Element Properties dialog. go to the Settings menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. During the demolition and renovation process. define the units. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you create a new project. 4 Click Cancel. are visible in this view. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 7 Click Cancel. under Phasing. click Project Units. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . If you wish to do so.rvt. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. under Phasing. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file.

are highlighted in red. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. under Floor Plans. for Phase Created. and click OK. including the door tags. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 14 On the Design Bar. click . 17 Click No. After you release the mouse button. 10 On the Options Bar. Phasing Your Model | 763 . Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. TIP If this were a multi-story building.Existing.Demo. right-click Level 1 .Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Rename dialog. all of the building model elements. 11 In the Filter dialog. clear Door Tags. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. and click OK. right-click Level 1. Because this is a renovation project. select Existing. After you create the views. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 . under Phasing. under Floor Plans. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. enter Level 1 .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Because this is a phase-specific view. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click Rename. enter Level 1 . and click OK. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 19 In the Project Browser.Existing.

double-click Level 1 . Notice that the line pattern is still gray. to which all the building model elements belong. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. You may need to zoom in to see this. 29 For Composite Plan. Next. In this case. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Existing. 24 In the Project Browser.Existing. and click OK.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 26 In the Phasing dialog. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. select Existing. select Overridden. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. under New. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. new construction occurs after existing construction. 21 In the Project Browser. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under Floor Plans. Phase status is time-dependent. under Phasing. Later in this exercise. enter Composite Plan. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Because of this time relationship. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. you modify these settings. Demolished. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. however. On a logical time line. and Temporary. There are five default phase filters. double-click Level 1 . 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Floor Plans. for Phase. 27 Click New. 28 Under Filter Name. click the Phase Filters tab.Demo. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction.

Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. As you click each wall. select the line style. under Floor Plans. click (Demolish). click the value for Color. double-click Level 1 . or you can use the demolish tool. its display changes to a red dashed line. double-click Level 1 . There are two ways to demolish an element. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display.Demo. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 35 Click OK twice. select a lighter blue. select the interior walls one at a time. Phasing Your Model | 765 . select Demolished. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 32 In the Demolished row. select red. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. under Floor Plans. you demolish all elements hosted by it. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Next. under Cut ➤ Lines. 34 In the Color dialog. you begin demolition. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.31 Under Phase Status. When you demolish the host. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 36 Using the same method. 42 In the Project Browser.Existing. click OK.

select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". and click OK. and click OK. under Phasing. 47 In the Type Selector. for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 53 Open Level 1 .Existing. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 50 In the Type Selector. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase Filter. click Wall. select Show Previous + New.Demo. 49 On the Design Bar. click Door.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Phasing. 52 Open Level 1 . 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. add a long horizontal wall. The demolished walls no longer display. select Basic Wall: Interior .4 7/8" Partition (1-hr).

60 On the View toolbar. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. new is shown in blue. regardless of phase. 62 If necessary. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. The renovated building model plan is displayed.New.New. 57 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 767 . and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 61 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Open Level 1 . All elements are displayed in this view. click (Default 3D View). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .Demo. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. which are displayed as red. right-click Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All.

Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you can do so at this time. click Project Units. demolition.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. As the renovation process continues. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. If you wish to save this file. sizes.Existing.rvt. You can also see that the room quantities. click Training Files.Demo. you can see the new walls added to the building model. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. expand Floor Plans. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and new construction. 2 Open Level 1 . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.New. the rooms change in both definition and size. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In this view. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1 . and click OK. In this view. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. In this exercise. define the units. 3 Open Level 1 . go to the Settings menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. therefore. Notice that this view is the original building model. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. If you wish to do so. 63 Close the file. All room boundaries are phase-specific.

In the Phasing dialog. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Room Tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. and maximize the view. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar.Demo. yet they have different room numbers. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 6 Open Level 1 . 13 Open Level 1 .New. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.Existing. click Room. Use the following illustration as a guide. 5 Click OK. click in each room as you move to the right. click Modify. click Room. notice that there are two phases defined in this project.

Existing. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 20 Close the file. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. The two schedule views tile.15 Using the following illustration as a guide.New Construction. In this exercise. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. 19 On the Window menu. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. and double-click Room Schedule . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. click Close Hidden Windows. In addition. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser. In this case. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. View phase-specific room schedules. click Tile. 18 Open Room Schedule .

In this tutorial. 771 . In the final lesson. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. performance. You position the building models on the site plan. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. This maximizes efficiency. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Comparison of alternatives on a site. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. modify their visibility. and manage the links throughout the project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. In these situations.

you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link two building models to the project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You position the building models on the site. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. modify their visibility. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. One building model is a condominium. and the other is a townhouse. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Auto . click Save As. you can do so.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.rvt. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Close. click Training Files. with write permission. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Click Open.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. click Open. and click OK.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. 2 On the File menu. c_Condo_Complex. right-click. this system is not exposed to the user. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. RELATED See the lesson. and save the file there. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. this option will place the link at a predefined location. c_Townhouse. select the three files. however. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . This option is grayed out. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. 5 On the File menu. click Open. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. All three files now reside. Select c_Site.■ Auto . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. Manual . Otherwise. 4 On the File menu. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . 8 Clear Read-only. and click Properties. ■ ■ Manual . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. and open Common\c_Site.

12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 11 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. click Project Units. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. If you wish to do so.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Notice the blue detail lines. and make your changes. 13 Click Open. For Positioning. you can go to the Settings menu.Origin to Origin. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). select Auto .

16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.rvt displays in the Type Selector. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 17 For the move endpoint.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The Move command requires two clicks. After you select it. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. click (Move). The first click specifies the move start point. The linked model moves as one object. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.

the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and select c_Townhouse. 18 On the View menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. For Positioning. select Auto . 21 Click Open.Origin to Origin.After you specify the location to move to.

when the vertical line displays. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). In this case. 23 On the Edit toolbar. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . and then click to specify the end of the rotation.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. click (Move). 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.

click (Copy). The first click specifies the start point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point.

34 On the Options Bar. click Rotate. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). use the Move command to make any adjustments. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. under Identity data. click . 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. for Name.

2 On the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing. they were placed too low within the site topography. click and hold Orbit. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . you need this project file open and in this view. click (SteeringWheels). Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. After linking the files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. When you originally linked the files. click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. In this exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. In this exercise. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development.38 On the File menu. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

When using the Align command. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. and click to select it. In this case.rvt. To do this.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 3 In the Project Browser. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. click (Align). you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. Click the Revit Links tab. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. and then select the plane that you want to align. In the steps that follow. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. you first select the plane you want to align to. when it highlights. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click to select the line. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. expand Elevations. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. under Views (all). and double-click South. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.

11 Return to the South elevation view. click 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). double-click North. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. under Elevations. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 9 In the Project Browser. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 12 On the View toolbar.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 15 On the File menu. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 14 On the SteeringWheels. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click Save. click and hold Orbit. This would over-constrain the model. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . (SteeringWheels).

click OK. 9 Under Visibility. detail level. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click By Host View. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. click Custom. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Under Visibility. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. you need this project file open and in this view. As you can see. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you can independently control the visibility settings. If you have not completed the previous exercise. In this exercise. click the Revit Links tab. 2 On the View menu. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. under Elevations. or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. display settings. 10 Click OK. By linked view. double-click South. When you link a file. do so before continuing. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. In the next exercise.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. expand c_Townhouse. 8 For Annotation Categories. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and the halftone settings for each linked project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. scroll down and clear Levels. If the Basics page is set to Custom. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. select <Custom>.

15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. click the Revit Links tab. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. and then set the detail level to coarse. double-click Level 1. click Visibility/Graphics. In this case. You can click the value for Detail Level. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Using the Custom option. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Display Settings. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. on the Basics tab. 24 Click OK. expand c_Townhouse. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt. By selecting custom under Model Categories. or fine. select Custom. With linked files. By default. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 14 On the View menu. 16 Under Visibility. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. and click OK. click the Revit Links tab. select <Custom>. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. no detail level changes are required. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. medium. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click By Host View. under Floor Plans. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt. you can also apply halftone to individual categories.rvt. 23 In the Model categories list.

After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. under Visibility. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. 31 On the File menu. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. In this exercise. all new. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. With the Show All filter applied. on a sloped site for instance. 26 Under Display Settings. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. existing. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. click Save. 28 Select By linked view for View range. select c_Townhouse. demolished. and phase filter of a specific link. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. click Custom for the Townhouse link. In most cases. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. there are situations. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. All other components are grayed out. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. you manage the linked files. 25 On the Revit Links tab. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. this is preferable. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial.rvt. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. In this case. phase. click OK. 29 Click OK. In this case. However. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By default. you need this project file open and in this view.

5 Click Unload. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The default path type is Relative. Notice the Loaded. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. In general. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. If you have not completed the previous exercise. do so before continuing. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. In a shared coordinate environment. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. 6 At the confirmation prompt. 7 Click OK. Locations Not Saved. the link is maintained. and Saved Path fields are read only.rvt. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . 4 Under Linked File. click Manage Links. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. click Yes. 3 Under Path Type. click the Revit tab. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. They supply information regarding the links. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. select c_Condo_Complex.

click the arrow next to the Open button. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. and select Specify. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. and click Reload.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. If you choose not to open that workset. click Save As. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. the link is not loaded. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. In general. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click c_Condo_Complex. However. To do this. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. expand Revit Links. When you initially place the link. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. In these cases.rvt. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases.

When you share coordinates between projects. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In essence. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In this exercise. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. leave the project file open in its current view. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you are establishing a shared origin point. name the file Site_Project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In the next lesson. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. The host file consists primarily of site components. do so before continuing. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When used in conjunction with model linking. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. and save it as an RVT file. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. and the resulting project files. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project.10 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models.

As indicated in the Status Bar. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. Linking Building Models on page 772. In this case. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the lesson. click the Condo Complex. click Open.rvt and click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. When you are working in the host project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. 2 On the Tools menu.coordinates are used. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. do so before continuing. Select Site_Project. If you have closed the project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. and the resulting project files. open it before continuing. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 In the drawing area. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. 5 On the Design Bar. this location is not saved outside of the host project. However. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. when the edges highlight. These three locations can be named Lot A. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. and click OK. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. In this exercise. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. select Location 1. but can have multiple additional locations. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. it is placed at a specific location. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. Lot B. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. do so before continuing. click to select it. On the Status Bar. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. even though both models originate from one linked file. and Lot C. you need this project file open and in this view. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. then the location becomes saved in the linked file.

This is a one-time operation. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Rename dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. click . notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Change. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.2 On the Options Bar. In the Choose Location dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click Rename. and click OK. and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Instance Parameters. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. Record the current position as a location. enter Lot A for New. click Reconcile. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. select Move instance to. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. When constraining a link to a location. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 4 Under Value. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click OK. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. . Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. under Instance Parameters. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

click Manage Links. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 23 Click Save Locations. you cannot redefine its location. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 26 Click OK. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. the active location position is moved. select the second option. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Notice the OK button is still not active. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. and click OK. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. and the left townhouse resides at that location. When you release the mouse button. make sure Lot B is selected. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.Notice the OK button is not active. Record current position as. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Because Lot A is currently in use. and click OK. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 30 On the Tools menu. By relocating a project. The first click specifies the move start point. When you relocate a project. To explicitly save a location. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. This is a two-click process. a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. The second click specifies the move endpoint. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. enter Lot B for Name. and then select the townhouse project. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click OK. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click Duplicate. click OK. ignore the warning. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. or cancel the action. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. click OK. click the Revit tab. select Save. 16 Click Change. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 19 In the Select Location dialog. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. When you create a location.

click Undo to return the origin to its original position. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. In this exercise. click Close. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 34 On the File menu. 36 On the File menu. you work in one of the linked projects. NOTE In the following exercise. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. and click OK. 33 On the Edit menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Save. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. select Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog.

click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 2 On the File menu. The current active location is Lot A. Also. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. Select c_Condo_Complex. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. select Auto . if other models were linked into the same host. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. If you have not completed the exercises. In addition. For Positioning. Click Open. double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. it is placed automatically within the host project.rvt file. Because this building model only has one named location.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. When opening the linked file. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . do so before continuing. under Floor Plans.rvt file.By Shared Coordinates.

Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. click Duplicate. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In this exercise. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. select True North for Orientation. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. In the host file. enter Lot C. 7 Click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. 3 In the Name dialog. 6 Select Lot B. you can select Lot C if necessary. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. click View Properties. In this exercise. and click Make Current. under Graphics. you create a new location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. In the next exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. you manage the shared locations. orient a view to true north. click Manage Place and Locations. click OK. do so before continuing. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Manage Place and Locations. you need this project file open and in this view.

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. click Open. 10 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. On the Options Bar. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.rvt and click Open. Select Site_Project. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. do so before continuing. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . If you have not completed the exercise. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise. click Close. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. under Category. click the Fields tab. select Doors. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Schedule/Quantities.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. 5 Under Available fields. and click OK.

You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and click Properties. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. right-click Door Schedule. 14 On the File menu. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 12 Select Grand totals. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You have completed this tutorial. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 13 On the File menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. and then click OK twice. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 .8 Click OK. click Close. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. clear Itemize every instance. click Save. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Family and Type for Sort by. under Other. In this exercise.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

you modify the system environment. and your username when using worksets. 6 In the New Project dialog. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 3 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click the value for Selection color. selection default options. journal cleanup options. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 In the Options dialog. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click Training Files. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. notification preferences. These settings control the graphics. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. click OK.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 11 Under Colors. 4 Under Colors. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click Browse. select Invert background color. under Template file. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you create an office template. 803 . Finally. click the Graphics tab. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. they are not saved to project files or template files. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project.rte. which is independent of the project settings. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 In the New Project dialog. In the second lesson. and set it as your default template. In the first lesson.

click Wall. 13 Click the General tab. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 15 Click OK. 22 When prompted to save changes. For Tooltip assistance. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Settings. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 In the Options dialog.rvt. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 19 On the Design Bar. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. select None. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select the wall. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select yellow. click the Graphics tab. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. clear Invert background color. click Modify. click No. select red. For Selection color. click Modify. and click OK. However. 14 Under Notifications. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 18 On the Design Bar. When an error occurs.12 In the Color dialog. click Training Files. the elements causing the error display using this color. select One hour. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval.

This path is set automatically during the installation process. select your preferred Save reminder interval. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. click Places. such as in a large. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. click Browse. and family libraries. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. including your default project template. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 5 Under Default path for user files. select Normal. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. However. If prompted. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. click Browse. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. 8 Click Cancel. you can start a new project with that template. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Specifying File Locations on page 805. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. under Default path for family template files. 4 Click Cancel. click the File Locations tab. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. For Tooltip assistance. These files are used in the software support process. family template files. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Under Journal File Cleanup. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and click Open. and click Browse to select a template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 10 In the Places dialog. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.27 Click the General tab. do not save the changes. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Under Username. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 7 In the Options dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. centralized. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. TIP To view a template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . select the folder to save your files to by default. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Your login name displays by default. 3 Under Default template file. you specify default file locations. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. notice the list of library names.

notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and click Open. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or loading a Revit Architecture file. 11 In the Places dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. In the following illustration. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and select it as the library path. When you are opening. click (Add Value). saving. or families. and change the name to My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. templates. and click the icon side of the field.library names and path. and you can create new libraries. under Libraries. Load. Save.

2 In the Options dialog. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Load. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 3 Under Settings. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 22 Click Places. specify the new location here. This path is determined during installation.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and Import dialogs. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. If you work in a large office. 21 Click the File Locations tab. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 28 Click OK. Save. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 9 In the text editor. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 5 In the text editor. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and decal image files. click My Library. view the current path. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 15 Under Library Name. click the My Library icon. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. custom color files. 23 Select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . and click OK twice. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. such as bump maps. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 24 Click 25 Click OK.

Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click default template. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the New Project dialog. click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 12 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 20 Under Personal dictionary.rte. click OK. 22 In the text editor. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 23 In the Options dialog. click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. In this exercise. click Text. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. As you zoom in and out within a view. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off.11 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Edit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modify snap increments. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click the Spelling tab. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 19 Under Settings. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you modify snap settings. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. do not save the changes. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Restore Defaults. work with snapping turned off. click Browse. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Modify. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. If prompted. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. under Template file. 21 In the text editor. 18 In the Options dialog.

. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and enter 500 . If it does not. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. While sketching. click OK. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom out until it does so. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter SM. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. 7 Under Object Snaps. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments.6 Under Dimension Snaps. clear Chain. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. TIP To zoom while sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. click Wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. use the wheel button on your mouse.

Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 24 Click OK. the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click Modify. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 18 Enter SM. and move the cursor to the right. and click Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and do not save the file.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 21 Move the cursor downward. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. If you move the cursor along the wall. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point. and specify the wall endpoint.. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. and delete the value 500 . 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and the wall edges.

When you apply a material to an element. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. lines. In the steps that follow. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. and open Metric\m_Settings. annotations.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you render a region to observe the changes. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. save the project file with a unique name. Using these options. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Finally. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. You create and modify materials. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . fill patterns. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise.rvt. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and object styles. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views.

11 Click OK. 3 Click (Duplicate). However. When a model element is loaded into a project. select Stone. and click OK. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library.Fieldstone material.Fieldstone.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.Fieldstone. read-only library for render appearances. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 6 Click Replace. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Masonry . You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. In the next exercise. The properties describe the color. 10 Click the Graphics tab. scale. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and click OK. and texture of the material. 9 Click Apply. and click (Element Properties). In the Materials dialog. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. enter Masonry . Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. These details will display in rendered images. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. When you change properties of a render appearance. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The Render Appearance Library is a local. and select Masonry . the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. In the steps that follow. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. this material provides a starting point for the new material. for Class.Stone. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

19 On the right side of the Material field. select Masonry . 22 Select the left exterior wall. 17 For Structure.Brick.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Click OK three times. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 On the View Control Bar. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 16 Enter the new wall name.Fieldstone. 18 For Finish 1. and click OK. . click Model Graphics Style. 15 Click Duplicate. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 24 In the Type Selector. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click in the Material field. select the rear exterior wall. click (Default 3D View). 23 While pressing CTRL.Fieldstone. and click OK. click This is the material that you created. click Edit/New. Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.

In the following exercise. select the render region (a red rectangle). When finished. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 31 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the 3D view. select Low or Medium. click Rendering Dialog. for Setting. right-click the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. and click Rendering. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. The rendering process begins. under Quality. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. select Region. click Render.

rvt. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. click Show the model. such as steel. Zoom into the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and double-click West. 3 Under Pattern Type. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. choose Model. 7 Under Custom. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. in the Rendering dialog. select Custom. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. expand Elevations. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. and clear Region. 34 Close the Rendering dialog.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. click Show the model. 5 Click New. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. click Import. Then click Render again. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference.

In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click Modify. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Fieldstone.56. 13 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. enter . 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Pattern Type. 23 On the Design Bar. enter Fieldstone.Fieldstone material. click . (Element Properties). and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. click in the Material field. 11 Click OK. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. and click OK. select Model. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 10 For Name. 18 Under Surface Pattern. select fldstn. click OK. click to select a fill pattern. and for Import scale. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 22 Click OK three times.pat. 17 On the right side of the Materials field.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for Finish 1. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click 15 For Structure. and click OK. 9 Under Custom. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.

you can set the window frame material to By Category. m_Settings-in progress. TIP If the pattern does not display. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. adjust your zoom settings as needed. expand 3D Views. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and double-click 3 Windows. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. For example.25 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. there are often multiple window types within a project. 2 On the keyboard.

Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. and click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 In the Materials dialog. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. for Trim Exterior Material. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click in the Value column. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. click By Category. click (Element Properties). under Materials and Finishes. under Materials and Finishes. 11 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 9 Click OK twice. click By Category (located under the materials list). 5 On the Options Bar. for Trim Exterior Material. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 15 Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Materials dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . click in the Value column. 10 Select the arched window.

Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. type red.red paint. enter Trim . click OK. or keywords include the word red. select Paint. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. click OK. click in the Material column. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Class. 25 In the search field. . expand Windows. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 19 For Trim. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 23 Click Replace. and select Trim. descriptions. When you render a 3D view. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. and click OK. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. select Trim. for Name. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 18 On the Model Objects tab. (Duplicate). 28 Under Shading.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. is open with the 3D view active. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.31 On the View toolbar. enter Roof Line. 10 For Line Color. select Roof Line. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Roofs. 11 For Line Pattern. Now that you have created a line pattern. for Name.rvt. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. select Red. click New. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .rvt. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. under Category. (Default 3D view). Use object styles to apply the change to all views. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 On the View Control Bar. m_Settings-in progress.

12 Click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . under 3D Views. 14 On the View Control Bar. but not the line pattern. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click to Building. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the line color displays in this view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected.

NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Plans. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Solid. under Floor Plans. select Blue. For Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 18 For Line Color. select Black. select Roofs. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select 5. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 15 In the Project Browser. under Category. select Roof Line. for Visibility. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 19 For Line Pattern. 20 Click OK. sections. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. elevations. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Pattern. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click 03 Roof. click Override. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. select Roofs.

28 In the Line Styles dialog. click Lines. This places the line above the topography. Click Click (Draw). select Level: 02 Entry Level. Notice the site topography and the property lines. (Line). select Zoning Setback. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. For Line Pattern. 29 For Name. select Red. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select Double dash. under Modify Subcategories. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter Zoning Setback. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 34 On the Options Bar. click New. For Line Color. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK.25 Click OK twice. 31 Click OK. select 2. 33 In the Type Selector.

43 Click OK. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. click (Default 3D View). 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 39 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 825. select it. 40 In the Project Browser. and then clear Property Lines. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. Expand Site.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Model Categories tab. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. 44 On the View toolbar. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Zoning Setback. 36 On the View toolbar. NOTE If Site is not selected. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Default 3D View). double-click 02 Entry Level.

click the default value. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. and then click outside the second wall. For Units. To place a dimension. click Modify. Modifying Annotations | 825 . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click Duplicate. click Dimension. and place a dimension on the floor plan. You have created a new dimension style. 9 In the Type Selector.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. double-click 02 Entry Level. click one wall. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. select Linear . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Imperial. click another wall. 4 Enter the name Linear . select Feet and fractional inches. (Undo). is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. m_Settings-in progress. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.Imperial and click OK. 5 Under Text. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. m_Settings-in progress. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. for Units Format. 7 Click OK twice. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.

click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 19 Click Load. 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number as the assigned tag. Leave M_Window Tag . under Category. In the preview image. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. notice that the label displays 1i. click Training Files. 18 In the Tags dialog. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 16 Click Cancel. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 24 While pressing CTRL. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. select the 3 window tags. scroll down to Windows. 27 On the west wall. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. click (Element Properties). 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. clear Leader. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Number. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 23 Click OK. Then press Delete.rfa. 28 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . A window instance tag displays on the selected window.Number.14 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Tags dialog. click M_Window Tag .Number is now the assigned tag. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 26 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . click the bottom window.

you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. dimension values display using this setting. (Default 3D View). and Detail Level Options on page 827. m_Settings-in progress. and Detail Level Options | 827 . 2 In the Project Units dialog. 32 On the View toolbar. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 30 Under Leader. select 0 decimal places. Specifying Units of Measurement. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Click OK. verify that Create is clear. For Unit symbol. select meters squared. and click OK. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. for Rounding. and click OK. for Length. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 9 Under Doors and Windows. 6 Click OK. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Temporary Dimensions. select Openings. Unless overridden. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. In the second section. click the default value. 8 Under Walls. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. notice Window Tags appears twice. select Faces. select To the nearest 100.Temporary Dimensions.Number. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. click Modify. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. M_Window Tag . Specifying Units of Measurement. 3 In the Format dialog. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the detail level assignments. and click OK. click the default value. for Area. Specifying Units of Measurement. 4 In the Project Units dialog.rvt. the other displays the instance value.Under Category. In the first section. dimensions use these project settings. Unless overridden. 31 On the Design Bar.Temporary Dimensions. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. you specify the project units of measurements. In the final section.

828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click Training Files.In this project. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. You do not select a view scale to move it. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. expand Floor Plans. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and expand 3D Views. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In this table.rvt. In this exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Click OK. click .

In the Project Browser.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 5 On the Views tab. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the Project Browser. and click OK.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . expand each view type. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click Apply. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 8 Select Phase. select Discipline. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. notice that views are grouped by phase.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. select Type/Discipline.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand Sheets (all). notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 2 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . and click OK.

Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. under Sheets. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. click the Folders tab. and click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 Click the Views tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click New. 14 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set. 12 Click the Sheets tab.

you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. when you create a new project. Proceed to the next lesson.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and Discipline. View Type (Family and Type). When you create new projects. expand Complete. the same rules apply. you create an office template. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. and click OK. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. and view names. Creating an Office Template on page 831. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Browse. Whenever you create a new project or template. For example. and expand both Architectural and Structural. Creating an Office Template | 831 . you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. enter a unique file name. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 Under Template file. navigate to your preferred directory.rte template. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In the lesson that follows. If you want to save this file. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. You can choose from several templates. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In this lesson. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and click OK. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you select the starting point for your office template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. You can also save these settings in a template file. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. and click Open. 21 In the Project Browser. under Views. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. dimensions styles. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. expand 3D Views. In that case. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. levels. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. and open Metric\Templates.

7 In the Project Browser. click Browse. and double-click North. 13 Select the default template. 9 In the Project Browser. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 15 Under Create new. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you modify the project settings for your new template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In this exercise. you can select it now. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Project template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 6 Click OK. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. For example. 12 Under Template File. and click OK. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. in the drawing area. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. If you have additional projects open. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. When you create the material. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. for Create new.5 In the New Project dialog. weights. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. If you want to use a template other than the default. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. close them. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 14 Click Open. select Project. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above.

see the previous lesson. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. and imported objects. including color. You can align. create new subcategories. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. For more details on modifying these settings. or refer to the online help. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. rotate. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. or refer to the online help. Observe the materials that are already defined. you can set line weights. and move model patterns. specific modifications are not dictated. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. and materials for model objects. and scroll through the list of categories.During this exercise. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. or modify existing patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 4 Click Replace. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. 9 Click OK when finished. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. For more information. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. 2 Scroll down the materials list. TIP For more information about creating new materials. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. In the Object Styles dialog. annotation objects. and similar attributes. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. see a preview of the rendered material. 13 If necessary. When you create or modify a material. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. You do this by defining the render appearance. line patterns. line colors. Modifying System Settings on page 803. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . texture. If you change render appearance properties. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. create and modify them as needed. and change render appearance properties. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. transparency.

34 Click OK. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. name the style. and dimensions.15 Modify categories. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 29 Click OK. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 19 If necessary. and create new subcategories as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. select it from this list. modify the line weight. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. such as section lines and dimension lines. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. tags. create new line subcategories. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 20 Click OK. line color. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 32 To modify a line pattern. 18 For existing line categories. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. and click Edit. click Duplicate. To see the details of a particular style. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. You can add and delete view scales. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. select it. and specify the properties. or line pattern as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns.

You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. In the Tags dialog. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Linear.40 Click OK. click Load. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 57 Specify the Slope option. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and choose a decimal symbol. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 62 Click OK. name the style. 46 Click OK. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and radial dimensions are modified separately. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. For example. 53 For Length. TIP In the drawing area. angular. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 58 Click OK. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. and click OK. and specify the properties. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 50 To load new annotation tags. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. click Duplicate. 55 Click OK. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. To see the details of a particular style. and Angle settings. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Volume. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. select it from this list. click Format. 60 Under Walls. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.

Links to associated tutorials are provided. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . create new browser organization types. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. You can find additional information in Help. 65 Click OK. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 71 Delete. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. or edit existing organization types. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. rename. 68 Delete. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Use the table below as a checklist. create new browser organization types. 70 Click the Sheets tab. In such a case. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. and move view scales as needed. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. Medium. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 69 If necessary. click the arrows between columns. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. See Setting up If necessary. click the Views tab. or Fine. 64 Review the table. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. To move the view scales. However. or edit existing organization types. and make modifications in each area as necessary. For example. 72 If necessary. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 73 Click OK. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. The detail level is based on view scale. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Using the arrows between the columns. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. rename. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. When you create a new view.

75 Proceed to the next exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. For example.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. If necessary. you can set the default contour line interval. you can move onto the next component type. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. you could load detail components. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. click Door. the section cut material. If this selection is satisfactory. you may want to delete. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. In the steps that follow. However. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. In addition. Depending on the intended use of this template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. if you load every available window type. you do both. or add to this selection. do so before starting this exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. furniture. phase filters. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. or use the Project Browser. notice the list of doors already loaded. you can set up the phases. Although this is possible. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. and electrical fixtures. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Although the options are endless. or electrical fixtures. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. If you have not completed the previous exercise. You can load any family or group into a template. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. title blocks. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. there are some important thoughts to consider. modify. For example. and the poche depth.

Enter a name. click Bar. Make modifications. create. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Load. Modify type properties. In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that each family category is listed. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. and click OK. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Edit/New. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.3 To modify. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. create. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. or load a new door type. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. click Edit/New. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Click Duplicate. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. or modify a door. Select it. expand Families.

You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . Detail Level. To load a title block. This title block is currently part of the template. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. and select the title block type. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you created new projects using different templates. click 12 Click Preview. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. To do so. you create the views required for your template. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. 11 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. create. click Load. load. and click Delete. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. 13 Click OK. In addition. View Range.) 10 Expand the title block. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. In addition. right-click the component. Discipline. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. In this exercise.

8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. In this exercise. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. under Floor Plans. At any time. under Floor Plans. Every time a new plan view is created. and click OK. 6 Click OK. you will first modify view templates. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. click Apply. select Architectural Plan. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. and then click OK.settings of categories and subcategories. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. click Apply. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. double-click South. 18 If you modified any other view templates. After applying the template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and double-click Level 1. under Elevations. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 11 Click Apply. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 2 Under Names. In addition. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 4 If necessary. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. double-click Level 2. select Site Plan. and click OK. and apply the appropriate template. 12 In the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. you can apply a view template to any view. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. open the view from the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action.

31 Rename the 3D View. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. a face. and click Properties. click Schedule/Quantities. use the ViewCube. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 23 To add more levels to the template. click Level. and elevations. 27 Create additional levels as needed. right-click the ViewCube. and click Rename. 24 On the Options Bar. If you want to modify view properties. in the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. review the existing floor plans. and click Save View. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Rename. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. on the View toolbar. notice that you have the option to rename. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. duplicate. To orient the 3D view to another view. or delete this view. click Orient to View. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}.Notice the level names. or delete them as needed. and select the desired direction. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. right-click Level 1. By default. right-click the view name. enter a view name. and. under Floor Plans. and select the desired view. right-click the ViewCube. 22 In the Project Browser. review the floor plans. Black level heads have no associated views. expand 3D Views. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. or an edge of the ViewCube. 21 In the Project Browser. click Orient to a Direction. select Make Plan View. (Default 3D View). 20 In the Project Browser. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. under 3D Views. duplicate. in the shortcut menu. If it does not display. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. If prompted. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To orient the 3D view to a direction. ceiling plans. 30 In the Project Browser.

35 If you want to add schedules to your template. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. and click OK. You can still add views to the sheet. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. or exportlayersdgn. and click Add View to Sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. To do so. select and order required fields.You can add schedules to a template. After the sheet is created. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. expand Sheets (all). On the Formatting tab. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. To later add a title block to a sheet. and modify their properties accordingly. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. in the Project Browser. Select a view. On the Filter tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. When you import a DWG or DXF file.txt for AutoCAD. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. click Add View. select the default title block. on the View tab of the Design Bar. assign filters. modify settings as needed. select the category type. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . On the Appearance tab. select the title block and delete it. 37 Click OK. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. 40 To add views to the sheet. and click Rename. You are prompted to select a title block. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842.txt for MicroStation). modify settings as needed. select one. modify settings as needed. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. Right-click the sheet name. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. and click OK. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click OK. 42 Create new sheets as needed.

doors. and so on. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Using shared parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and so on. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. 8 In the dialog. and related multi-category tags and schedules. You can save these mappings to a text file. When you create a multi-category schedule. 9 Click Save As. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. for example. 5 For each category. project parameters. windows. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). and click Save. and click Save. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. select Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. For example. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. When scheduling. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. therefore. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. name the file. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. 2 For each category. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. click Save As. name the file. They cannot be shared with other projects. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. These settings are retained within the project template.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and they become the set mappings for the project.

click New. and choose a shared parameter. project parameters. 17 Under Discipline. 8 Under Parameters. 14 Click Add. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 11 For each parameter group. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. If this template will be used by multiple team members. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. select Project parameter. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. and specify its discipline and type. click New. add required parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 22 Click OK. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 25 Click Select. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can create a list of parameters. and click OK. 5 Enter the group name. for Name. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. under Groups. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. If a file already exists. select a group to add parameters to. click Add.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select a parameter discipline type. 21 Under Categories. 3 Name and save the file. 16 Under Parameter Data. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 19 Under Group parameter under. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 24 To add a shared project parameter. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 9 Name the parameter. select a parameter value type. 2 Click Create. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 6 Create as many groups as needed. and select Shared Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter a parameter name. 10 Click OK. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 26 Click OK. For each parameter group. because each office has a unique set of needs.

38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. for Name. paper placement. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click OK. For each printer. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. and click Open.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 32 Navigate to the directory. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. save the file as a template. and make it your default template file. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you can load them into the template. or refer to the online help. 35 For Name. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. click Setup. select the tag. and the percent of actual size. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. The tag is now part of the template. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 2 Under Printer. click Schedule/Quantities. By going first to the Print command. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. 3 Under Settings. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. you can set options such as sheet sizes. select Multi-Category. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 5 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 34 For Category. 6 In the New dialog. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. make minor modifications if necessary. Click OK. 28 Click OK. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. enter a name for the schedule. and click OK. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. For information on creating multi-category tags. you need only select a setting. and print. 4 Modify the printer settings. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create named print settings. In this exercise. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. By creating named settings within the template.

you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 15 Name the template. In this lesson. This can provide a good starting point for a template. select a different printer. and click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. enter a new name for the printer. 9 In the Print dialog. and click Save. select Template Files (*. 20 Click OK. 25 Click OK. Create additional settings as needed. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Your template is complete. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 11 Click Close when finished. 14 Under Save as type. 19 Select the template. If you need to share this file with others. click Setup. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. If you have a project. In addition. The only remaining task is to save it. You can also set this template as your default template. By investing the time to individualize your template. and click Open.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. click Save as. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 22 Click the File Locations tab. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. modify the printer settings. and click Open. and create new settings for this printer. 18 Click Browse. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modified settings. loaded components. save it in a network location. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. select it. and saved them to a template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 10 Repeat these steps as needed. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 23 For Default template file. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. click Browse. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. In addition. 24 Navigate to the template location.rte). you ensure that office standards are maintained.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful